Model 7260

DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Instruction Manual
190163-A-MNL-D

Copyright © 1998 EG&G INSTRUMENTS CORPORATION

FCC Notice

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with this manual, may cause interference to radio
communications. As temporarily permitted by regulation, operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user at his own facility
will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

Declaration of Conformity

This product conforms to EC Directives 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility

Directive, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, and Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
amended by 93/68/EEC.

This product has been designed in conformance with the following IEC/EN standards:

EMC: BS EN55011 (1991) Group 1, Class A (CSPIR 11:1990)

BS EN50082-1 (1992):
IEC 801-2:1991
IEC 801-3:1994
IEC 801-4:1988

Safety: BS EN61010-1: 1993 (IEC 1010-1:1990+A1:1992)

Trademarks
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation
Microsoft, MS-DOS, QBASIC, GWBASIC and QuickBASIC are registered trademarks and Windows is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation
National Instruments is a registered trademark of National Instruments Corporation
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1, Introduction
1.1 How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 What is a Lock-in Amplifier? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Key Specifications and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Chapter 2, Installation & Initial Checks

2.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.01 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.02 Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.03 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.04 Line Cord Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.05 Line Voltage Selection and Line Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Initial Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.01 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.02 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Chapter 3, Technical Description

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.01 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.02 Signal Recovery / Vector Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.03 Single Reference / Dual Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.04 Single Harmonic / Dual Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.05 Internal / External Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.06 Virtual Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.01 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.02 Signal Channel Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.03 Line Frequency Rejection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.04 AC Gain and Dynamic Reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.05 Anti-Aliasing Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.06 Main Analog-to-digital Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

i
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.07 Reference Channel DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.3.08 Phase-shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.09 Internal Oscillator - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.3.10 Internal Oscillator - Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3.11 Internal Oscillator - Frequency & Amplitude Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.12 Demodulator DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3.13 Output Processor - Output Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3.14 Output Processor - Output Offset and Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3.15 Output Processor - Vector Magnitude and Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.3.16 Output Processor - Noise Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.17 Auxiliary Analog Inputs and Outputs (ADCs and DACs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.18 Main Microprocessor - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.19 Main Microprocessor - Auto Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.4 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.4.01 Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.4.02 Power-up Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Chapter 4, Front and Rear Panels

4.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.01 A and B/I Signal Input Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.02 OSC OUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.03 REF IN Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.04 LCD Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.05 HELP Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.1.06 MENU Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.1.07 DISP Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.1.08 SET Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.01 Line Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.02 Line Power Input Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.03 RS232 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.04 AUX RS232 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.05 GPIB Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.06 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.07 PREAMP POWER Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.08 REF MON Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.09 REF TTL Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.10 ADC3 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.2.11 SIG MON Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4.2.12 CH1 and CH2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.13 TRIG Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.14 ADC1 and ADC2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.15 DAC1, DAC2, DAC3 and DAC4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.16 FAST X and FAST Y Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Chapter 5, Front Panel Operation

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3 Menu Descriptions - Single Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3.01 Main Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3.02 Display Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.03 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.04 Signal Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.05 Reference Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.06 Output Channels Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3.07 Oscillator Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.3.08 Frequency Sweep Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3.09 Amplitude Sweep Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.10 User Options 1 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.11 Equation #1 / Equation #2 Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.3.12 DACs & ADCs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.3.13 ADC1 & 2 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.3.14 ADC3 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.3.15 Curve Buffer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.3.16 Curve Select Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.3.17 User Options 2 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.3.18 Single Graph Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.3.19 Double Graph Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.3.20 Auto Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.3.21 Communications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.3.22 RS232 Comms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.3.23 GPIB Comms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.3.24 Comms Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.3.25 ‘*’ Command Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.3.26 Digital Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.3.27 Display Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.4 Menu Descriptions - Virtual Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

5.4.01 Virtual Reference Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.4.02 Virtual Reference (2) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.4.03 Main Display - Virtual Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.4.04 User Options 2 Menu - Virtual Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.5 Menu Descriptions - Dual Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.5.01 Dual Reference Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.5.02 Dual Reference Main Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.5.03 Dual Reference Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.5.04 Ext Output Channel (1) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.5.05 Int Output Channel (2) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.5.06 Auto Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.5.07 User Options 2 Menu - Dual Reference Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.6 Menu Descriptions - Dual Harmonic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.6.01 Dual Harmonic Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.6.02 Dual Harmonic Main Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.6.03 Reference Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.6.04 Output Channel (1) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.6.05 Output Channel (2) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.6.06 Auto Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.6.07 User Options 2 Menu - Dual Harmonic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.7 Typical Lock-in Amplifier Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Chapter 6, Computer Operation

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.01 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.02 Curve Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.03 Curve Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.3 RS232 and GPIB Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3.01 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3.02 RS232 Interface - General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3.03 Choice of Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.04 Choice of Number of Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.05 Choice of Parity Check Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.06 Auxiliary RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.07 GPIB Interface - General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.08 Handshaking and Echoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.3.09 Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.3.10 Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.11 Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.12 Compound Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.13 Status Byte, Prompts and Overload Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.14 Service Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3.15 Comms Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4 Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.01 Signal Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.02 Reference Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4.03 Signal Channel Output Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.4.04 Signal Channel Output Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.4.05 Instrument Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4.06 Internal Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.4.07 Auxiliary Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.4.08 Auxiliary Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.4.09 Output Data Curve Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.4.10 Computer Interfaces (RS232 and GPIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.4.11 Instrument Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.12 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.4.13 Auto Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.4.14 Dual Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.5 Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5.01 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5.02 Basic Signal Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5.03 Frequency Response Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.5.04 X and Y Output Curve Storage Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.5.05 Transient Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.5.06 Frequency Response Measurement using Curve Storage and Frequency Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

Appendix A, Specifications

Appendix B, Pinouts
B.1 RS232 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2 Preamplifier Power Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.3 Digital Output Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

v
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Appendix C, Demonstration Programs

C.1 Simple Terminal Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.2 RS232 Control Program with Handshakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.3 GPIB User Interface Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Appendix D, Cable Diagrams

D.1 RS232 Cable Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Appendix E, Alphabetical Listing of Commands

Appendix F, Default Settings

Auto Default Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Index

WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Manual

vi
Introduction

Chapter 1

1.1 How to Use This Manual

This manual gives detailed instructions for setting up and operating the EG&G
Instruments Model 7260 Digital Signal Processing (DSP) dual phase lock-in
amplifier. It is split into the following chapters:-

Chapter 1 - Introduction
Provides an introduction to the manual, briefly describes what a lock-in amplifier is
and the types of measurements it may be used for, and lists the major specifications of
the model 7260.

Chapter 2 - Installation and Initial Checks

Describes how to install the instrument and gives a simple test procedure which may
be used to check that the unit has arrived in full working order.

Chapter 3 - Technical Description

Provides an outline description of the design of the instrument and discusses the effect
of the various controls. A good understanding of the design will enable the user to get
the best possible performance from the unit.

Chapter 4 - Front and Rear Panels

Describes the connectors, controls and indicators which are found on the unit and
which are referred to in the subsequent chapters.

Chapter 5 - Front Panel Operation

Describes the capabilities of the instrument when used as a manually operated unit,
and shows how to operate it using the front panel controls.

Chapter 6 - Computer Operation

This chapter provides detailed information on operating the instrument from a
computer over either the GPIB (IEEE-488) or RS232 interfaces. It includes
information on how to establish communications, the functions available, the
command syntax and a detailed command listing.

Appendix A
Gives the detailed specifications of the unit.

Appendix B
Details the pinouts of the multi-way connectors on the rear panel.

Appendix C
Lists three simple terminal programs which may be used as the basis for more
complex user-written programs.

1-1
Chapter 1, INTRODUCTION

Appendix D
Shows the connection diagrams for suitable RS232 null-modem cables to couple the
unit to an IBM-PC or 100 % compatible computer.

Appendix E
Gives an alphabetical listing of the computer commands for easy reference.

Appendix F
Provides a listing of the instrument settings produced by using the Auto-Default
function.

New users are recommended to unpack the instrument and carry out the procedure in
chapter 2 to check that it is working satisfactorily. They should then make themselves
familiar with the information in chapters 3, 4 and 5, even if they intend that the unit
will eventually be used under computer control. Only when they are fully conversant
with operation from the front panel should they then turn to chapter 6 for information
on how to use the instrument remotely. Once the structure of the computer commands
is familiar, appendix E will prove convenient as it provides a complete alphabetical
listing of these commands in a single easy-to-use section.

1.2 What is a Lock-in Amplifier?

In its most basic form the lock-in amplifier is an instrument with dual capability. It
can recover signals in the presence of an overwhelming noise background or
alternatively it can provide high resolution measurements of relatively clean signals
over several orders of magnitude and frequency.

Modern instruments, such as the model 7260, offer far more than these two basic
characteristics and it is this increased capability which has led to their acceptance in
many fields of scientific research, such as optics, electrochemistry, materials science,
fundamental physics and electrical engineering, as units which can provide the
optimum solution to a large range of measurement problems.

The model 7260 lock-in amplifier can function as a:-

n AC Signal Recovery Instrument n Transient Recorder

n Vector Voltmeter n Precision Oscillator
n Phase Meter n Frequency Meter
n Spectrum Analyzer n Noise Measurement Unit

These characteristics, all available in a single compact unit, make it an invaluable

addition to any laboratory.

1-2
 Chapter 1, INTRODUCTION

1.3 Key Specifications and Benefits

The EG&G Instruments Model 7260 represents the latest in DSP Lock-in Amplifier
technology at an affordable price and offers:-

n Frequency range: 0.001 Hz to 250 kHz

n Voltage sensitivity: 2 nV to 1 V full-scale

n Current input mode sensitivities: 2 fA to 1 µA full-scale

2 fA to 10 nA full-scale

n Line frequency rejection filter

n Dual phase demodulator with X-Y and R-θ outputs

n Very low phase noise of < 0.0001° rms

n 5-digit output readings

n Dual reference mode - allows simultaneous measurement of two signals at

different reference frequencies up to 20 kHz

n Single and dual harmonic mode - allows simultaneous measurement of up to two

different harmonics of a signal

n Virtual reference mode - allows reference free measurement of signals up to

60 kHz

n Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) oscillator with variable amplitude and

frequency

n Oscillator frequency and amplitude sweep generator

n Output time constant: 10 µs to 100 ks

n 8-bit programmable digital output port for external system control

n Three external ADCs, four external DACs

n Full range of auto-modes

n Standard IEEE-488 and RS232 interfaces with RS232 daisy-chain capability for
up to 16 instruments

n Large back-lit liquid crystal display (LCD) with menus for control and display of
instrument outputs in both digital and graphical formats

n 32768 point internal curve storage buffer

1-3
Chapter 1, INTRODUCTION

1-4
Installation &
Initial Checks
Chapter 2

2.1 Installation
2.1.01 Introduction
Installation of the model 7260 in the laboratory or on the production line is very
simple. Because of its low power consumption, the model 7260 does not incorporate
forced-air ventilation. It can be operated on almost any laboratory bench or be rack
mounted, using the optional accessory kit, at the user’s convenience. With an ambient
operating temperature range of 0 °C to 35 °C, it is highly tolerant to environmental
variables, needing only to be protected from exposure to corrosive agents and liquids.

2.1.02 Rack Mounting

An optional accessory kit, part number K02003, is available from EG&G
Instruments to allow the model 7260 to be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

2.1.03 Inspection
Upon receipt the model 7260 Lock-in Amplifier should be inspected for shipping
damage. If any is noted, EG&G INSTRUMENTS should be notified immediately and
a claim filed with the carrier. The shipping container should be saved for inspection
by the carrier.

2.1.04 Line Cord Plug

A standard IEC 320 socket is mounted on the rear panel of the instrument and a
suitable line cord is supplied.

2.1.05 Line Voltage Selection and Line Fuses

Before plugging in the line cord, ensure that the model 7260 is set to the voltage of
the AC power supply to be used.

A detailed discussion of how to check and, if necessary, change the line voltage
setting follows.

CAUTION: The model 7260 may be damaged if the line voltage is set for 110 V
AC operation and it is turned on with 220 V AC applied to the power input
connector.

The model 7260 can operate from any one of four different line voltage ranges,
90-110 V, 110-130 V, 200-240 V, and 220-260 V, at 50-60 Hz. The change from one
range to another is made by repositioning a plug-in barrel selector internal to the Line
Input Assembly on the rear panel of the unit. Instruments are normally shipped from

2-1
Chapter 2, INSTALLATION & INITIAL CHECKS

the factory with the line voltage selector set to 110-130 V AC, unless they are
destined for an area known to use a line voltage in the 220-260 V range, in which
case, they are shipped configured for operation from the higher range.

The line voltage setting can be seen through a small rectangular window in the line
input assembly on the rear panel of the instrument (figure 2-1). If the number
showing is incorrect for the prevailing line voltage (refer to table 2-1), the barrel
selector will need to be repositioned as follows.

Observing the instrument from the rear, note the plastic door immediately adjacent to
the line cord connector (figure 2-1) on the left-hand side of the instrument. When the
line cord is removed from the rear-panel connector, the plastic door can be opened
outwards by placing a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in the slot on the right-hand side
and levering gently. This gives access to the fuse and to the voltage barrel selector,
which is located at the right-hand edge of the fuse compartment. Remove the barrel
selector with the aid of a small screwdriver or similar tool. With the barrel selector
removed, four numbers become visible on it: 100, 120, 220, and 240, only one of
which is visible when the door is closed. Table 2-1 indicates the actual line voltage
range represented by each number. Position the barrel selector such that the required
number (see table 2-1) will be visible when the barrel selector is inserted and the door
closed.

Figure 2-1, Line Input Assembly

VISIBLE # VOLTAGE RANGE

100 90 - 110 V
120 110 - 130 V
220 200 - 240 V
240 220 - 260 V

Table 2-1, Range vs Barrel Position

Next check the fuse rating. For operation from a nominal line voltage of 100 V or
120 V, use a 20 mm slow-blow fuse rated at 1.0 A, 250 V. For operation from a
nominal line voltage of 220 V or 240 V, use a 20 mm slow-blow fuse rated at 0.5 A,
250 V.

To change the fuse, first remove the fuse holder by pulling the plastic tab marked with
an arrow. Remove the fuse and replace with a slow-blow fuse of the correct voltage
and current rating. Install the fuse holder by sliding it into place, making sure the
arrow on the plastic tab is pointing downwards. When the proper fuse has been
installed, close the plastic door firmly. The correct selected voltage setting should now

2-2
 Chapter 2, INSTALLATION & INITIAL CHECKS

be showing through the rectangular window. Ensure that only fuses with the required
current and voltage ratings and of the specified type are used for replacement. The
use of makeshift fuses and the short-circuiting of fuse holders is prohibited and
potentially dangerous.

2.2 Initial Checks

2.2.01 Introduction
The following procedure checks the performance of the model 7260. In general, this
procedure should be carried out after inspecting the instrument for obvious shipping
damage.

NOTE: Any damage must be reported to the carrier and to EG&G

INSTRUMENTS immediately. In addition the shipping container must be
retained for inspection by the carrier.

Note that this procedure is intended to demonstrate that the instrument has arrived in
good working order, not that it meets specifications. Each instrument receives a
careful and thorough checkout before leaving the factory, and normally, if no shipping
damage has occurred, will perform within the limits of the quoted specifications. If
any problems are encountered in carrying out these checks, contact EG&G
INSTRUMENTS or the nearest authorized representative for assistance.

2.2.02 Procedure
1) Ensure that the model 7260 is set to the line voltage of the power source to be
used, as described in section 2.1.05.

2) With the rear-panel mounted power switch (located at the extreme top left-hand
corner of the instrument when viewed from the rear) set to 0 (off), plug in the line
cord to an appropriate line source.

3) Turn the model 7260 power switch to the I (on) position.

4) The instrument’s front panel display will now briefly display the following:-

Figure 2-2, Opening Display

2-3
Chapter 2, INSTALLATION & INITIAL CHECKS

5) Wait until the opening display has changed to the Main Display and then press the
front panel key marked MENU once to enter the Main Menu, shown below in
figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3, Main Menu

6) Press one of the keys adjacent to the Auto Functions menu item to enter the Auto
Functions menu, shown below in figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4, Auto Functions Menu

7) Press one of the keys adjacent to the Auto Default menu item. This will set all the
instrument’s controls and the display to a defined state. The display will revert to
the Main Display, as shown below in figure 2-5, with the right-hand side showing
R, the vector magnitude, and θ, the phase, of the measured signal in digital form,
with two bar-graphs showing the X channel output and Y channel output as a
percentage of the full-scale sensitivity. The left-hand side shows four instrument
controls, these being the AC Gain and dynamic reserve (DR) in decibels, full-
scale sensitivity (SEN), output time constant (TC) and internal oscillator
frequency (OSC).

2-4
 Chapter 2, INSTALLATION & INITIAL CHECKS

Figure 2-5, Main Display

8) Connect a BNC cable between the OSC OUT and A input connectors on the
front panel.

9) The right-hand side of the display should now indicate R, the vector magnitude,
close to 100 % of full-scale (i.e. the sinusoidal oscillator output, which was set to
1 kHz and a signal level of 0.5 V rms by the Auto-Default function is being
measured with a full-scale sensitivity of 500 mV rms) and θ, the phase, of near
zero degrees, if a short cable is used.

This completes the initial checks. Even though the procedure leaves many functions
untested, if the indicated results were obtained then the user can be reasonably sure
that the unit incurred no hidden damage in shipment and is in good working order.

2-5
Chapter 2, INSTALLATION & INITIAL CHECKS

2-6
Technical Description

Chapter 3

3.1 Introduction
The model 7260 lock-in amplifier is a sophisticated instrument with many capabilities
beyond those found in similarly-priced units. This chapter discusses the various
operating modes provided and then describes the design of the instrument by
considering it as a series of functional blocks. In addition to describing how each
block operates, the sections also include information on the effect of the various
controls.

3.2 Operating Modes

3.2.01 Introduction
The model 7260 incorporates a number of different operating modes which are
referred to in the following technical description, so in order to help the reader’s
understanding they are defined here.

3.2.02 Signal Recovery / Vector Voltmeter

The model 7260 is primarily intended for signal recovery applications, where the
requirement is usually for an instrument offering the best rejection of interfering
signals and the lowest possible noise. Although a dual phase unit like the model 7260
may be used for measuring the phase of the applied signal with respect to the
reference, the accuracy of this measurement is not usually paramount. This operating
mode is called the signal recovery mode and is the default mode on power-up.

In situations where the applied signal is essentially free of noise some of the circuitry
needed for best signal recovery performance may be bypassed, giving an
improvement in the accuracy of phase measurements but at the expense of increased
noise. In the model 7260 this can be done by selecting the vector voltmeter mode.

3.2.03 Single Reference / Dual Reference

Conventionally, a lock-in amplifier makes measurements such as signal magnitude,
phase, etc. on the applied signal at a single reference frequency. In the model 7260
this is referred to as the single reference mode.

The dual reference mode incorporated in the model 7260 allows the instrument to
make simultaneous measurements at two different reference frequencies, an ability
that previously required two lock-in amplifiers. This flexibility incurs a few
restrictions, such as the requirement that one of the reference signals be external and
the other be derived from the internal oscillator, the limitation of the maximum
operating frequency to 20 kHz and the requirement that both signals be passed

3-1
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

through the same input signal channel. This last restriction implies either that both
signals are derived from the same detector (for example two chopped light beams
falling onto a single photodiode) or that they can be summed prior to measurement,
either externally or by using the differential input mode of the instrument.
Nevertheless, the mode will prove invaluable in many experiments. Note that in dual
reference mode there is no advantage in using vector voltmeter mode and this is not
recommended.

3.2.04 Single Harmonic / Dual Harmonic

Normally, a lock-in amplifier measures the applied signal at the reference frequency.
However, in some applications such as Auger Spectroscopy and amplifier
characterization, it is useful to be able to make measurements at some multiple “n”,
or harmonic, of the reference frequency “F”. The model 7260 allows this multiple to
be set to any value between 2 (i.e. the second harmonic) and 65535, as well as unity,
which is the normal mode. The only restriction is that the product “nF” cannot exceed
250 kHz.

Dual harmonic mode allows the simultaneous measurement of two different

harmonics of the input signal. As with dual reference mode, there are a few
restrictions, such as a maximum value of “nF” of 20 kHz. Again, it should be noted
that in dual harmonic mode there is no advantage in using vector voltmeter mode as
well, so this is not recommended.

3.2.05 Internal / External Reference Mode

In the internal reference mode, the instrument’s reference frequency is derived from its
internal oscillator and the oscillator signal is used to drive the experiment.

In the external reference mode, the experiment includes some device, for example an
optical chopper, which generates a reference frequency which is applied to the lock-in
amplifier’s external reference input. The instrument’s reference channel “locks” to
this signal and uses it to measure the applied input signal.

3.2.06 Virtual Reference Mode

If the instrument is operated in internal reference mode, measuring a signal which is
phase-locked to the internal oscillator, with the reference phase correctly adjusted,
then it will generate a stable non-zero X channel output and a zero Y channel output.
If, however, the signal is derived from a separate oscillator, then the X channel and
Y channel outputs will show variations at a frequency equal to the difference between
the signal and internal oscillator frequencies. If the latter is now set to be equal to the
former then in principle the variation in the outputs will cease, but in practice this will
not happen because of slow changes in the relative phase of the two oscillators.

In the virtual reference mode, believed to be unique to EG&G Instruments, the

Y channel output is used to make continuous adjustments to the internal oscillator
frequency and phase to achieve phase-lock with the applied signal, such that the X
channel output is maximized and the Y channel output zeroed.

3-2
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

If the instrument is correctly adjusted, particularly ensuring that the full-scale

sensitivity control is maintained at a suitable setting in relation to changes in the
signal level, then the virtual reference mode is capable of making signal recovery
measurements which are not possible with other lock-in amplifiers.

3.3 Principles of Operation

3.3.01 Block Diagram
The model 7260 utilizes two digital signal processors (DSP), a microprocessor and a
dedicated digital waveform synthesizer, together with very low-noise analog circuitry
to achieve its specifications. A block diagram of the instrument is shown in figure
3-1. The sections that follow describe how each functional block operates and the
effect it has on the instrument’s performance.

Figure 3-1, Model 7260 - Block Diagram

3.3.02 Signal Channel Inputs

The signal input amplifier may be configured for either single-ended or differential
voltage mode operation, or single-ended current mode operation. In voltage mode a
choice of AC or DC coupling is available and the input may be switched between
FET and bipolar devices. In current mode a choice of two conversion gains is
available to give optimum matching to the signal input. In both modes the input
connector shells may be either floated via a 1 kΩ resistor or grounded to the
instrument’s chassis ground. These various features are discussed in the following
paragraphs.

3-3
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

Input Connector Selection, A / -B / A - B

When set to the A mode, the lock-in amplifier measures the voltage between the
center and the shell of the A input BNC connector, whereas when set to the A-B mode
it measures the difference in voltage between the center pins of the A and B/I input
BNC connectors.

The latter, differential, mode is often used to eliminate ground loops, although it is
worth noting that at very low signal levels it may be possible to make a substantial
reduction in unwanted offsets by using this mode, with a short-circuit terminator on
the B/I connector, rather than by simply using the A input mode.

The specification defined as the Common Mode Rejection Ratio, C.M.R.R., defines
how well the instrument rejects common mode signals applied to the A and B/I inputs
when operating in differential input mode. It is usually given in decibels. Hence a
specification of > 100 dB implies that a common mode signal (i.e. a signal
simultaneously applied to both A and B/I inputs) of 1 V will give rise to less than
10 µV of signal out of the input amplifier.

The input can also be set to the -B mode, in which case the lock-in amplifier measures
the voltage between the center and the shell of the B/I input connector. This extra
mode effectively allows the input to be multiplexed between two different single-
ended signals, subject to the limitation that the user must allow for the signal
inversion (equivalent to a 180° phase-shift) which it introduces when reading the
outputs.

Input Connector Shell, Ground / Float

The input connector shells may be connected either directly to the instrument’s
chassis ground or they can be floated by being connected via a 1 kΩ resistor. When in
the float mode, the presence of this resistor substantially reduces the problems which
often occur in low-level lock-in amplifier measurements due to ground loops.

Input Device Selection, FET / Bipolar

The voltage preamplifier may be switched between bipolar and FET input devices.
The bipolar device, which has an input impedance of 10 kΩ, shows a relatively high
level of added current noise (2 pA/√Hz), but less than 50 percent of the voltage noise
of the FET device. As such, it is intended for use where the source impedance is
resistive or inductive with a resistance of 100 Ω or less, and there is no input voltage
offset.

NOTE: Signal channel overload may occur if the bipolar device is selected and no
DC bias path is provided.

The FET device provides an input impedance of 10 MΩ with a voltage noise at 1 kHz
of less than 5 nV√Hz.

AC / DC Coupling
In normal operation, with reference frequencies above a few hertz, AC-coupled
operation is always used.

The primary purpose of the DC-coupling facility is to enable the use of the instrument

3-4
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

at reference frequencies below 0.5 Hz. It may also be used to reduce the effect of
phase and magnitude errors introduced by the AC-coupling circuitry below a few
hertz.

However, the use of DC coupling introduces serious problems where the source has a
DC offset or is of such high impedance that bias currents cause significant offsets. In
these cases it may be necessary to include some form of signal conditioning between
the signal source and the lock-in amplifier.

The instrument always reverts to the AC-coupled mode on power-up, to protect the
input circuitry.

Input Signal Selection, V / I

Although the voltage mode input is most commonly used, a current-to-voltage
converter may be switched into use to provide current mode input capability, in which
case the signal is connected to the B/I connector. High impedance sources (> 100 kΩ)
are inherently current sources and need to be measured with a low impedance current
mode input. Even when dealing with a voltage source in series with a high impedance,
the use of the current mode input may provide advantages in terms of improved
bandwidth and immunity from the effects of cable capacitance.

The converter may be set to low-noise or wide bandwidth conversion settings, but it
should be noted that even at the wide bandwidth setting the -3 dB point is at 50 kHz.
Better performance may be achieved using a separate current preamplifier, such as
the EG&G model 5182.

3.3.03 Line Frequency Rejection Filter

Following the signal input amplifier, there is an option to pass the signal through a
line frequency rejection filter, which is designed to give greater than 40 dB of
attenuation at the power line frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz and their second
harmonics at 100 Hz and 120 Hz.

Instruments manufactured prior to July 1996 use a simple single-stage band-rejection

filter, which has a relatively broad bandwidth. This introduces significant gain and
phase errors, at least in the range 5 to 500 Hz, and this should be taken into account
if it is used in conjunction with reference frequencies in or near to this range. The
filter control settings for these units are simply “ON” or “OFF”.

Instruments manufactured after June 1996 use a more sophisticated type of filter,
which uses two cascaded rejection stages with “notch” characteristics. This allows the
filter to be set to reject signals at frequencies equal to either of, or both of, the
fundamental and second harmonic of the line frequency. Hence the filter control
settings for these instruments are “OFF”, “F”, “2F” or “F & 2F”.

Although these later instruments are supplied with the line frequency filter set to
match the line frequency of the country for which they are destined, it should be
appreciated that if a unit is moved from a 50 Hz area to a 60 Hz area then the filter
will need to be adjusted. The instruments therefore respond to a computer command,
LINE50, which allows this to be done (see section 6.4.01). There is no provision for
changing the line filter frequency from the front panel.

3-5
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3.3.04 AC Gain and Dynamic Reserve

The signal channel contains a number of analog filters and amplifiers whose overall
gain is defined by the AC Gain parameter, which is specified in terms of decibels
(dB). For each value of AC Gain there is a corresponding value of the INPUT LIMIT
parameter, which is the maximum instantaneous (peak) voltage or current that can be
applied to the input without causing input overload, as shown in table 3-1 below.

AC Gain (dB) INPUT LIMIT (mV)

0 3000
10 1000
20 300
30 10
40 30
50 10
60 3
70 1
80 0.3
90 0.1

Table 3-1, Input Limit vs AC Gain

It is a basic property of the digital signal processing (DSP) lock-in amplifier that the
best demodulator performance is obtained by presenting as large a signal as possible
to the main analog-to-digital converter (ADC). Therefore, in principle, the AC Gain
value should be made as large as possible without causing the signal channel
amplifier or converter to overload. This constraint is not too critical however and the
use of a value 10 or 20 dB below the optimum value makes little difference. Note that
as the AC Gain value is changed, the demodulator gain (described later in section
3.3.12) is also adjusted in order to maintain the selected full-scale sensitivity.

The full-scale sensitivity is set by a combination of AC Gain and demodulator gain.

Since the demodulator gain is entirely digital, changes in full-scale sensitivity which
do not change the AC Gain do not cause any of the errors which might arise from a
change in the AC Gain.

The user is prevented from setting an illegal AC Gain value, i.e. one that would result
in overload on a full-scale input signal. Similarly, if the user selects a full-scale
sensitivity which causes the present AC Gain value to be illegal, the AC Gain will
change to the nearest legal value.

In practice, this system is very easy to operate. However, the user may prefer to make
use of the AUTOMATIC AC Gain feature which gives very good results in most
cases. When this is active the AC Gain is automatically controlled by the instrument,
which determines the optimum setting based on the full-scale sensitivity currently
being used.

Note that when signal overload occurs, the only action required is to reduce the
AC Gain value.

3-6
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

At any given setting, the ratio

Input Limit
DR = 0.7 ×
Full - Scale Sensitivit y

represents the factor by which the largest acceptable sinusoidal interference input
exceeds the full-scale sensitivity and is called the Dynamic Reserve of the lock-in
amplifier at that setting. (The factor 0.7 is a peak to r.m.s. conversion). The dynamic
reserve is often expressed in decibels, for which

DR(in dB) = 20 × log(DR(as a ratio ))

Applying this formula to the model 7260 at the maximum value of INPUT LIMIT
(3 V) and the smallest available value of FULL-SCALE SENSITIVITY (2 nV), gives
a maximum available dynamic reserve of about 1 × 109 or 180 dB. Figures of this
magnitude are available from any DSP lock-in amplifier but are based only on
arithmetical identities and do not give any indication of how the instrument actually
performs. In fact, all current DSP lock-in amplifiers become too noisy and inaccurate
for most purposes at reserves of greater than about 100 dB.

For the benefit of users who prefer to have the AC Gain value expressed in this form,
the model 7260 displays the current value of Dynamic Reserve in decibels, on the
input full-scale sensitivity control, up to a value of 100 dB above which the legend
“> 100 dB” appears on the control.

3.3.05 Anti-Aliasing Filter

Prior to the main analog-to-digital converter (ADC) the signal passes through an anti-
aliasing filter to remove unwanted frequencies which would cause a spurious output
from the ADC due to the nature of the sampling process.

Consider the situation when the lock-in amplifier is measuring a sinusoidal signal of
frequency fsignal Hz, which is sampled by the main ADC at a sampling frequency
fsampling Hz. In order to ensure correct operation of the instrument the output values
representing the fsignal frequency must be uniquely generated by the signal to be
measured, and not by any other process.

However, if the input to the ADC has, in addition, an unwanted sinusoidal signal with
frequency f1 Hz, where f1 is greater than half the sampling frequency, then this will
appear in the output as a sampled-data sinusoid with frequency less than half the
sampling frequency, falias = |f1 - nfsampling|, where n is an integer. This alias signal is
indistinguishable from the output generated when a genuine signal at frequency falias is
sampled. Hence if the frequency of the unwanted signal were such that the alias signal
frequency produced from it was close to, or equal to, that of the wanted signal then it
is clear that a spurious output would result.

For example, if the sampling frequency were 160 kHz then half the sampling
frequency would be 80 kHz. Let the instrument be measuring a signal of 55 kHz
accompanied by an interfering signal of 100 kHz. The output of the ADC would

3-7
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

therefore include a sampled-data sinusoid of 55 kHz (the required signal) and,

applying the above formula, an alias signal of 60 kHz (i.e. |100 kHz - 160 kHz|). If
the signal frequency were now increased towards 60 kHz then the output of the lock-
in amplifier would increasingly be affected by the presence of the alias signal and the
accuracy of the measurement would deteriorate.

To overcome this problem the signal is fed through the anti-aliasing filter which
restricts the signal bandwidth. When operating in signal recovery mode, at reference
frequencies below 60 kHz, the reference frequency is less than half the sampling
frequency and a conventional elliptic-type, low-pass anti-alias filter is used. This
enables the system to provide the lowest possible noise bandwidth. In signal recovery
mode at frequencies above 60 kHz an adaptive bandpass anti-alias filter is used. The
noise bandwidth of this filter is dependent on the reference frequency and is higher
than that of the conventional type of filter, but typically the noise penalty is
negligible.

In vector voltmeter mode the anti-alias filter is a simple Butterworth low-pass design
with a passband covering the whole range of the instrument. This arrangement leaves
more aliases unattenuated and gives a random noise penalty of 5 dB when compared
with signal recovery baseband mode (i.e. at reference frequencies ≤ 60 kHz), but may
be preferable in some situations because of its slightly better gain and phase accuracy.

It should be noted that the dynamic range of a lock-in amplifier is normally so high
that practical anti-alias filters are not capable of completely removing the effect of a
full-scale alias. For instance, even if the filter gives 100 dB attenuation, an alias at
the input limit and at the reference frequency will give a one percent output error
when the dynamic reserve is set to 60 dB, or a full-scale error when the dynamic
reserve is set to 100 dB.

In a typical low-level signal recovery situation, many unwanted inputs need to be

dealt with and it is normal practice to make small adjustments to the reference
frequency until a clear point on the frequency spectrum is reached. In this context an
unwanted alias is treated as just another interfering signal and its frequency is
avoided when setting the reference frequency.

A buffered version of the analog signal just prior to the main ADC is available at the
signal monitor (SIG MON) connector on the rear panel; it may be viewed on an
oscilloscope to monitor the effect of the signal channel filters and amplifiers.

3.3.06 Main Analog-to-digital Converter

Following the anti-alias filter the signal passes to the main 18-bit analog-to-digital
converter running at a sampling rate of 166 kHz. This rate is not fixed but is reduced
automatically by up to 4 %, as a function of the reference frequency, to ensure that
the sampling process does not generate a beat frequency close to zero hertz. For
example, if the reference frequency were 82.95 kHz and the sampling frequency were
not adjusted, a beat frequency of 50 Hz (|82.95 kHz - (166 kHz/2)|) would be
generated and, after demodulation, would appear at the output as a 100 Hz signal, if
the time constant were not set to a large enough value.

3-8
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

There is one situation where this automatic correction might not be sufficient to give
good performance. Consider the case where the signal being measured is at 73 kHz,
which is 10 kHz away from half the sampling frequency. If there were also a strong
interfering signal at 93 kHz (i.e. 166 kHz/2 + 10 kHz), then an alias of this would
give rise to a spurious output. Note that under these circumstances, the reference
frequency is not sufficiently close to half the sampling frequency to cause the latter to
be automatically adjusted. The problem is overcome by providing the Sample Rate
control which allows the user to adjust the main ADC sampling rate in steps of about
2 %. A 2 % change moves the alias by about 2 kHz, which is normally sufficient to
ensure rejection by the output low-pass filters and thereby remove any error.

The output from the converter feeds the first of the digital signal processors, the
demodulator DSP, which implements the digital multipliers and the first stage of the
output low-pass filtering for each of the X and Y channels. Before discussing this
DSP and the output stages of the lock-in amplifier we will look at the reference
channel which provides the other input to the demodulators.

3.3.07 Reference Channel DSP

The second, or reference, DSP in the instrument is responsible for implementing the
reference trigger/phase-locked loop, digital phase-shifter and internal oscillator look-
up table functional blocks on the block diagram (see figure 3-1). The processor
generates two main outputs, the first being a series of phase values, output at a rate of
one every 6 µs, which is used to drive the reference channel input of the demodulator
DSP, and the second being a sinusoidal signal which may be used as the instrument’s
internal oscillator output.

In dual reference mode operation, an externally derived reference frequency is

connected to the external reference input and a second reference is derived from the
internal oscillator. The reference DSP code for the internal and external channels runs
as an interleaved sequence, producing new phase values of each individual channel
once every 12 µs and sending these values to the demodulator DSP alternately at a
rate of one every 6 µs. Further discussion of dual reference mode occurs in section
3.3.12.

In single harmonic mode, the reference DSP generates phase values of a waveform at
the selected harmonic of the reference frequency. Dual harmonic mode operates in a
similar way to dual reference mode, but in this case the reference DSP generates
phase values for both of the selected harmonics of the reference frequency. Dual
harmonic mode may therefore be used with either internal or external references.

The instrument incorporates two reference frequency ranges, namely the baseband
from 1 mHz to 60 kHz and the highband from 60 kHz to 250 kHz. Different
hardware configurations are used in the two bands, transitions between which are
made automatically according to the value of the reference frequency. These
transitions are generally transparent to the user.

External Reference Mode

In external reference mode at frequencies above 300 mHz, the reference source may
be applied to either a general purpose input, designed to accept virtually any periodic

3-9
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

waveform with a 50:50 mark-space ratio and of suitable amplitude, or to a TTL-logic

level input. At frequencies below 300 mHz the TTL-logic level input must be used.
Following the trigger buffering circuitry the reference signal is passed to a digital
phase-locked loop (PLL) implemented in the reference DSP. This measures the period
of the applied reference waveform and from this generates the phase values.

Internal Reference Mode

With internal reference operation in the baseband mode (i.e. at reference frequencies
< 60 kHz), the reference processor is free-running at the selected reference frequency
and is not dependent on a phase-locked loop (PLL), as is the case in most other lock-
in amplifiers. Consequently, the phase noise is extremely low, and because no time is
required for a PLL to acquire lock, reference acquisition is immediate. See appendix
A for numerical values of phase noise.

In the internal reference highband mode (i.e. reference frequencies > 60 kHz), the
instrument essentially operates as if in external mode, except that the reference trigger
input is now provided by an internal link from the output of the direct digital
synthesizer.

Both the signal channel and the reference channel contain calibration parameters
which are dependent on the reference frequency. These include corrections to the anti-
alias filter and to the analog circuits in the reference channel. In external reference
operation the processor uses a reference frequency meter to monitor the reference
frequency and updates these parameters when a change of about 2 percent has been
detected.

All the parameters are also updated when the SET key is pressed or the LOCK
command is executed. Therefore, if the most accurate and reproducible settings are
required when in the external reference modes, the SET key should be pressed or the
LOCK command executed after every intentional change in reference frequency. Note
that sufficient time must be allowed for the frequency meter to give a fully accurate
value.

With internal reference operation, regardless of the frequency mode, the frequency-
dependent parameters are updated on any change of reference frequency, without the
need to press the front panel SET key or to issue the LOCK command.

A TTL logic signal at the present reference frequency is made available at the REF
MON connector on the rear panel.

3.3.08 Phase-shifter
The reference DSP also implements a digital reference phase-shifter, allowing the
phase values being sent to the demodulator DSP to be adjusted to the required value.
If the reference input is a sinusoid applied to the REF IN socket, the reference phase
is defined as the phase of the X demodulation function with respect to the reference
input.

This means that when the reference phase is zero and the signal input to the
demodulator is a full-scale sinusoid in phase with the reference input sinusoid, the X

3-10
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

channel output of the demodulator is a full-scale positive value and the Y channel
output is zero.

The circuits connected to the REF IN socket detect a positive-going crossing of the
mean value of the applied reference voltage. Therefore when the reference input is not
sinusoidal, its effective phase is the phase of a sinusoid with a positive-going zero
crossing at the same point in time, and accordingly the reference phase is defined with
respect to this waveform. Similarly, the effective phase of a reference input to the
TTL REF IN socket is that of a sinusoid with a positive-going zero crossing at the
same point in time.

In basic lock-in amplifier applications the purpose of the experiment is to measure the
amplitude of a signal which is of fixed frequency and whose phase with respect to the
reference input does not vary. This is the scalar measurement, often implemented with
a chopped optical beam. Many other lock-in amplifier applications are of the signed
scalar type, in which the purpose of the experiment is to measure the amplitude and
sign of a signal which is of fixed frequency and whose phase with respect to the
reference input does not vary apart from reversals of phase corresponding to changes
in the sign of the signal. A well-known example of this situation is the case of a
resistive bridge, one arm of which contains the sample to be measured. Other
examples occur in derivative spectroscopy, where a small modulation is applied to the
angle of the grating (in optical spectroscopy) or to the applied magnetic field (in
magnetic resonance spectroscopy). Double beam spectroscopy is a further common
example.

In this signed scalar measurement the phase-shifter must be set, after removal of any
zero errors, to maximize the X channel or the Y channel output of the demodulator.
This is the only method that will give correct operation as the output signal passes
through zero, and is also the best method to be used in an unsigned scalar
measurement where any significant amount of noise is present.

3.3.09 Internal Oscillator - General

The model 7260, in common with many other lock-in amplifiers, incorporates an
internal oscillator which may be used to drive an experiment. However, unlike most
other instruments, the oscillator in the model 7260 is digitally synthesized with the
result that the output frequency is extremely accurate and stable. The oscillator
operates over the same frequency range as the lock-in amplifier, that is 1 mHz to
250 kHz.

The source of the oscillator depends on whether the instrument is operating in internal
or external reference mode, in signal recovery or vector voltmeter mode and on the
selected frequency, as follows:-

Signal Recovery Mode

In internal reference baseband mode (< 60 kHz) the oscillator is derived from the
reference channel DSP. This outputs a series of digital values, corresponding to a
unity amplitude sinusoid of the required frequency, to a 16-bit digital-to-analog
converter (DAC) which in turn feeds a variable attenuator. The output of the
attenuator is the internal oscillator output.

3-11
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

In internal reference highband mode (> 60 kHz) and external reference mode, the
oscillator is derived from a dedicated direct digital synthesizer (DDS).

Vector Voltmeter Mode

In this mode, the oscillator is derived from a dedicated direct digital synthesizer
(DDS).

3.3.10 Internal Oscillator - Update Rate

The direct digital synthesis technique generates a waveform at the DAC output which
is not a pure sinusoid, but rather a stepped approximation to one. This is then filtered
by the buffer stage, which follows the DAC, to reduce the harmonic distortion to an
acceptable level.

It will be appreciated that, for a given total harmonic distortion, the update rate at
which new values are written to the oscillator output DAC need not be the same over
the whole range of oscillator frequencies. The model 7260 selects one of four values,
as defined in table 3-2 below.

Table 3-2, Internal Oscillator Output DAC Update Rate

Generally, the update rate will not be apparent to the user, except in two situations.
The first of these occurs when operating in dual reference mode at reference
frequencies approaching the upper limit of 20 kHz, where the 1/6 MHz (166.6 kHz)
update rate may be seen, since at a frequency of 20 kHz the oscillator waveform will
be composed of just over 8 steps per cycle.

The second occurs when the synchronous oscillator is switched on. In this mode,
available only in external single reference mode, the digital samples representing the
sinusoidal signal at the reference input to the X channel demodulator are converted to

3-12
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

an analog signal and routed via an adjustable-gain amplifier to the OSC OUT
connector. Since these samples are generated, and hence the output is updated, at a
fixed rate of 1/6 MHz (166.6 kHz), the OSC OUT signal becomes increasingly
difficult to interpret, when viewed on an oscilloscope, as the frequency increases
above about 20 kHz. In some applications these limitations may be overcome by the
use of a simple RC low-pass filter following the output.

When used in the synchronous oscillator mode, the signal at the OSC OUT connector
is affected by both the reference phase-shifter and harmonic controls of the reference
channel. For example, if an external reference at 1 kHz were applied, the unit were
set to operate in the 2F mode and the synchronous oscillator were turned on, then the
signal at the OSC OUT connector would be a 2 kHz sinusoid whose phase relative to
the applied reference could be adjusted using the reference phase-shifter. The
oscillator amplitude control affects the variable-gain amplifier and allows the
amplitude of the signal at the OSC OUT connector to be adjusted, but the oscillator
frequency control has no effect.

3.3.11 Internal Oscillator - Frequency & Amplitude Sweeps

The internal oscillator output may be swept in both frequency and amplitude. In both
cases the sweeps take the form of a series of steps between starting and finishing
values. Frequency sweeps may use equal increment step sizes, giving a linear change
of frequency with time as the sweep proceeds, or may use step sizes proportional to
the present frequency, which produces a logarithmic sweep. The amplitude sweep
function offers only linear sweeps.

A special form of the frequency sweep function is used to acquire lock when the
instrument is operating in the virtual reference mode. When this “seek” sweep is
activated, the oscillator starts at a user-specified frequency, which should be just
below that of the applied signal, and increments until the calculated magnitude output
reaches a maximum. At this point the internal oscillator frequency and signal
frequency are locked. The sweep then stops and the oscillator frequency is
continuously adjusted to maintain the Y channel output at zero.

It is important to note that this type of phase-locked loop, unlike a conventional edge-
triggered type using a clean reference, does not automatically re-acquire lock after it
has been lost. Lock can be lost as a result of a signal channel transient or a phase
reversal of the signal, in which case it may be necessary to repeat the lock acquisition
procedure. However, if the measurement system is set up with sufficient precautions,
particularly ensuring that the full-scale sensitivity is maintained at a suitable setting
in relation to the signal level, then the virtual reference mode is capable of making
signal recovery measurement which are not possible with other lock-in amplifiers.

When virtual reference mode is in use, the signal at the OSC OUT connector is a
sinusoid which is phase-locked to the signal. Naturally, this cannot be used as a
source for the measurement.

3-13
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3.3.12 Demodulator DSP

The essential operation of the demodulator DSP is to multiply the digitized output of
the signal channel by data sequences, called the X and Y demodulation functions, and
to operate on the results with digital low-pass filters (the output filters). The
demodulation functions, which are derived by use of a look-up table from the phase
values supplied by the reference channel DSP, are sinusoids with a frequency equal to
an integer multiple, nF, of the reference frequency F. The Y demodulation function is
the X demodulation function delayed by a quarter of a period. The integer n is called
the reference harmonic number and in normal lock-in amplifier operation is set to
unity. Throughout this chapter, the reference harmonic number is assumed to be unity
unless otherwise stated.

The outputs from the X channel and Y channel multipliers feed the first stage of the X
channel and Y channel output filters. The outputs of these in turn drive two 16-bit
DACs which generate the instrument’s FAST X and FAST Y analog output
connectors. In addition, the signals are fed to further low-pass filters before
subsequent processing by the instrument’s host microprocessor.

The demodulator output is digitally scaled to provide the demodulator gain control.
As discussed earlier in section 3.3.04 this gain is adjusted as the AC Gain is adjusted
to maintain a given full-scale sensitivity.

In dual reference and dual harmonic modes, the demodulator DSP generates two sets
of outputs, one for each of the two references or harmonics, and includes two sets
(four channels) of initial output filtering. These signals are passed to the host
processor in interleaved format, with every other signal, resulting from the Reference1
or Harmonic1 measurement, also being converted and appearing at the FAST X and
FAST Y analog output connectors. However, particularly when in the dual reference
mode, these signals are not easy to interpret when viewed on an oscilloscope and
hence we do not recommend their use. Consequently, in these modes the minimum
usable output time constant is that of the digital displays or CH1/CH2 analog
outputs, i.e. 5 ms.

3.3.13 Output Processor - Output Filters

Although shown on the block diagram as a separate entity, the output processor is in
fact part of the instrument’s main microprocessor. It provides more digital filtering of
the X channel and Y channel signals if this is needed in addition to that already
performed by the demodulator DSP. As with most lock-in amplifiers, the output filter
configuration in the model 7260 is controlled by the slope control. This may seem
somewhat strange, and a few words of explanation may be helpful.

In traditional audio terminology, a first-order low-pass filter is described as having a

slope of 6 dB per octave because in the high frequency limit its gain is inversely
proportional to frequency (6 dB is approximately a factor of 2 in amplitude and an
octave is a factor of 2 in frequency); similarly a second-order low-pass filter is
described as having a slope of 12 dB per octave. These terms have become part of the
accepted terminology relating to lock-in amplifier output filters and are used in the
model 7260 to apply to the envelope of the frequency response function of the digital

3-14
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

finite impulse response (FIR) output filters. Accordingly the front-panel control which
selects the configuration of the output filters is labeled SLOPE and the options are
labeled 6, 12, 18, 24 dB/octave.

The 6 dB/octave filters are not satisfactory for most purposes because they do not
give good rejection of non-random interfering signals which can cause aliasing
problems as a result of the sampling process in the main ADC. However, the 6 dB/
octave filter finds use where the lock-in amplifier is incorporated in a feedback
control loop, and in some situations where the form of the time-domain response is
critical. The user is recommended to use 12 dB/octave unless there is some definite
reason for not doing so.

Note that the filter slope for the FAST X and FAST Y outputs on the rear panel is
fixed at 6 dB/octave.

The output time constant can be varied between 10 µs and 100 ks. Values from 10 µs
to 640 µs are available at the FAST X and FAST Y outputs, while values from 5 ms
to 100 ks apply to all other outputs, including CH1, CH2 and the internal digital
values as reported to a remote computer or stored to the internal curve buffer. The
large digital displays and bar-graph indicators on the front panel have an effective
minimum time constant limit imposed by their update rates, which are 640 ms and
80 ms respectively. As noted in section 3.3.12 above, in dual reference and dual
harmonic modes the minimum output time constant is 5 ms, so that if an analog
output is required then the CH1 or CH2 connectors should be used.

The filters are of the finite impulse response (FIR) type with the averaging time of
each section being equal to double the nominal time constant. These filters offer a
substantial advantage in response time compared with analog filters or digital infinite
impulse response (IIR) filters.

When the reference frequency is below 10 Hz the synchronous filter option is

available. This means that the actual time constant of the filter is not generally the
selected value T, but a value which is equal to an integer number of reference cycles.
If T is greater than 1 reference cycle, then the time constant is between T/2 and T.

Where random noise is relatively small, synchronous filter operation gives a major
advantage in low-frequency measurements by enabling the system to give a constant
output even when the output time constant is equal to only 1 reference cycle.

3.3.14 Output Processor - Output Offset and Expand

Following the output filter, an output offset facility enables ±300 % full-scale offset
to be applied to the X, Y or both displays. Note that although the digital displays do
not limit until a level of ±300 % full-scale has been reached, the rear-panel CH1 and
CH2 analog outputs limit at ±120 % full-scale.

The output expand facility allows a x10 expansion, performed by simple internal
digital multiplication, to be applied to the X, Y, both or neither outputs, and hence to
the bar-graph displays and the CH1 and CH2 analog outputs, if these are set to
output X or Y values.

3-15
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3.3.15 Output Processor - Vector Magnitude and Phase

The processor also implements the magnitude and signal phase calculation which is
useful in many situations. If the input signal Vs(t) is a reference frequency sinusoid of
constant amplitude, and the output filters are set to a sufficiently long time constant,
the demodulator outputs are constant levels Vx and Vy. The function √(Vx2 + Vy2) is
dependent only on the amplitude of the required signal Vs(t) (i.e. it is not dependent on
the phase of Vs(t) with respect to the reference input) and is computed by the output
processor in the lock-in amplifier and made available as the magnitude output. The
phase angle between Vs(t) and the X demodulation function is called the signal phase:
this is equal to the angle of the complex quantity (Vx + jVy) (where j is the square root
of -1) and is also computed by the processor by means of a fast arc tan algorithm.

The magnitude and signal phase outputs are used in cases where phase is to be
measured, or alternatively where the magnitude is to be measured under conditions of
uncertain or varying phase.

One case of varying phase is that in which the reference input is not derived from the
same source as that which generates the signal, and is therefore not at exactly the
same frequency. In this case, if the input signal is a sinusoid of constant amplitude,
the X channel and Y channel demodulator outputs show slow sinusoidal variations at
the difference frequency, and the magnitude output remains steady.

However, the magnitude output has disadvantages where significant noise is present
at the outputs of the demodulator. When the required signal outputs (i.e. the mean
values of the demodulator outputs) are less than the noise, the outputs take both
positive and negative values but the magnitude algorithm gives only positive values:
this effect, sometimes called noise rectification, gives rise to a zero error which in the
case of a Gaussian process has a mean value equal to 0.798 times the combined root-
mean-square (r.m.s.) value of the X and Y demodulator noise. Note that unlike other
forms of zero error this is not a constant quantity which can be subtracted from all
readings, because when the square root of the sum of the squares of the required
outputs becomes greater than the total r.m.s. noise the error due to this mechanism
disappears.

A second type of signal-dependent error in the mean of the magnitude output occurs
as a result of the inherent non-linearity of the magnitude formula: this error is always
positive and its value, expressed as a fraction of the signal level, is half the ratio of
the mean-square value of the noise to the square of the signal.

These considerations lead to the conclusion that when the magnitude output is being
used, the time constants of the demodulator should be set to give the required signal-
to-noise ratio at the X channel and Y channel demodulator outputs; improving the
signal-to-noise ratio by averaging the magnitude output itself is not to be
recommended.

For analogous reasons, the magnitude function also shows signal-dependent errors
when zero offsets are present in the demodulator. For this reason, it is essential to
reduce zero offsets to an insignificant level (usually by the use of the Auto-Offset
function) when the magnitude output is to be used.

3-16
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

Note that the majority of signal recovery applications are scalar measurements, where
the phase between the required signal and the reference voltage is constant apart from
possible phase reversals corresponding to changes in the sign of the quantity being
measured. In this situation the lock-in amplifier is used in the normal X-Y mode, with
the phase-shifter adjusted to maximize the X output and to bring the mean Y output
to zero. (Refer to section 3.3.19 for further information on the correct use of the
Auto-Phase function for this purpose.)

3.3.16 Output Processor - Noise Measurements

The noise measurement facility is available only in the baseband mode (i.e. at
reference frequencies less than 60 kHz) and uses the output processor to perform a
noise computation on the Y output where it is assumed that the amplitude distribution
of the waveform is Gaussian with zero mean. The zero mean is usually obtained by
first using the reference phase control or the Auto-Phase function with a
comparatively long time constant (say 1 s) and then reducing the time constant (to say
10 ms) for the actual noise measurement.

The user is strongly advised to use an oscilloscope attached to the SIG MON (signal
monitor) output on the rear panel when making noise measurements as this is the best
way of ensuring that one is measuring a random process rather than line pick-up or
other non-random signals.

The indicated value of the noise (in V/√Hz or A/√Hz) is the square root of the mean
spectral density over the equivalent noise bandwidth defined by the setting of the
output filter time constant and slope. This bandwidth is given for the typical range of
time constants used for such measurements and each of the four possible filter slope
settings in table 3.3 below.

Time Constant Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (Hz) at Filter Slope

6 dB/octave 12 dB/octave 18 dB/octave 24 dB/octave
5 ms 50 37.5 31.25 27.35
10 ms 25 17.2 14.15 12.35
20 ms 12.5 8.3375 6.875 5.9875
50 ms 5 3.335 2.75 2.395
100 ms 2.5 1.6675 1.375 1.1975
200 ms 1.25 0.83375 0.6875 0.59875
500 ms 0.5 0.3335 0.275 0.2395
1s 0.25 0.16675 0.1375 0.11975
2s 0.125 0.083375 0.06875 0.059875
5s 0.05 0.03335 0.0275 0.02395
10 s 0.025 0.016675 0.01375 0.011975

Table 3-3, ENBW vs Filter Time Constant and Slope

Any two of the outputs, including X channel and Y channel signals, vector
magnitude, and phase angle, and even noise may be represented in analog form by
being routed via two further 16-bit DACs to the unit’s CH1 and CH2 output
connectors.

3-17
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3.3.17 Auxiliary Analog Inputs and Outputs (ADCs and DACs)

The model 7260 incorporates three auxiliary ADC inputs, two of which are
conventional sampled converters offering a resolution of 1 mV in ±10.000 V. These
converters may be used at slow sample rates for digitizing slowly changing or DC
signals which are associated with an experiment, such as those generated by
temperature and pressure transducers, so that they can be incorporated in ratio
calculations or transferred to a controlling computer. They may also be used in
conjunction with the instrument’s curve buffer to form a transient recorder operating
at sample rates of up to 40 kHz.

The third ADC is an integrating converter which integrates the applied voltage for a
defined period between 10 ms and 2 s, giving an effective resolution of between 12
and 20 bits.

Four auxiliary DAC outputs are also provided which offer the same resolution as the
ADCs, namely 1 mV in ±10.000 V.

3.3.18 Main Microprocessor - General

All functions of the instrument are under the control of a microprocessor which in
addition drives the front-panel display, processes front-panel key operations and
supports the RS232 and GPIB (IEEE-488) computer interfaces. This processor also
drives the instrument’s 8-bit digital (TTL) programmable output port, which may be
used for controlling auxiliary apparatus.

The microprocessor has access to a 32768 point memory which may be used for
storage of selected instrument outputs as curves, prior to their transfer to a computer
via the computer interfaces. In addition to using this function for the normal outputs,
such as the X channel and Y channel output signals, it may also be used with two of
the auxiliary ADC inputs to allow the instrument to operate as a transient recorder.
The internal oscillator frequency and amplitude sweep functions are also controlled
by the microprocessor.

A particularly useful feature of the design is that only part of the controlling firmware
program code, which the microprocessor runs, is permanently resident in the
instrument. The remainder is held in a flash EEPROM and can be updated via the
RS232 computer interface. It is therefore possible to change the functionality of the
instrument, perhaps to include a new feature or update the computer command set,
simply by connecting it to a computer and running an Update program.

3.3.19 Main Microprocessor - Auto Functions

The microprocessor also controls the instrument’s auto functions, which are control
operations executed by means of a single command or two key-presses. These
functions allow easier, faster operation in most applications, although direct manual
operation or special purpose control programs may give better results in certain
circumstances. During application of several of the auto functions, decisions are
made on the basis of output readings made at a particular moment. Where this is the
case, it is important for the output time constant set by the user to be long enough to

3-18
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

reduce the output noise to a sufficiently low level so that valid decisions can be made
and that sufficient time is allowed for the output to settle.

The following sections contain brief descriptions of the auto functions.

Auto-Sensitivity
This function only operates when the reference frequency is above 1 Hz. A single
Auto-Sensitivity operation consists of decreasing the full-scale sensitivity range if the
magnitude output is greater than 90 % of full-scale, or increasing the full-scale
sensitivity range if the magnitude output is less than 30 % of full-scale. After the
Auto-Sensitivity function is called, Auto-Sensitivity operations continue to be made
until the required criterion is met.

In the presence of noise, or a time-varying input signal, it may be a long time before
the Auto-Sensitivity sequence comes to an end, and the resulting setting may not be
what is really required.

Auto-Phase
In an Auto-Phase operation the value of the signal phase is computed and an
appropriate phase-shift is then introduced into the reference channel so as to bring the
value of the signal phase to zero. The intended result is to null the output of the Y
channel while maximizing the output of the X channel.

Any small residual phase can normally be removed by calling Auto-Phase for a
second time, after a suitable delay to allow the outputs to settle.

The Auto-Phase facility is normally used with a clean signal which is known to be of
stable phase. It usually gives very good results provided that the X channel and Y
channel outputs are steady when the procedure is called.

If a zero error is present on the outputs, such as may be caused by unwanted coupling
between the reference and signal channel inputs, then the following procedure should
be adopted:-

1) Remove the source of input signal, without disturbing any of the connections to
the signal input which might be picking up interfering signals from the reference
channel. In an optical experiment, for example, this could be done by shielding
the detector from the source of chopped light.

2) Execute an Auto-Offset operation, which will reduce the X channel and Y

channel outputs to zero.

3) Re-establish the source of input signal. The X channel and Y channel outputs will
now indicate the true level of input signal, at the present reference phase setting.

4) Execute an Auto-Phase operation. This will set the reference phase-shifter to the
phase angle of the input signal. However, because the offset levels which were
applied in step 2 were calculated at the original reference phase setting, they will
not now be correct and the instrument will in general display a non-zero Y
channel output value.

3-19
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5) Remove the source of input signal again.

6) Execute a second Auto-Offset operation, which will reduce the X channel and Y
channel outputs to zero at the new reference phase setting.

7) Re-establish the source of input signal.

This technique, although apparently complex, is the only way of removing the effect
of crosstalk which is not generally in the same phase as the required signal.

Auto-Offset
In an Auto-Offset operation the X offset and Y offset functions are turned on and are
automatically set to the values required to give zero values at both the X and the Y
outputs. Any small residual values can normally be removed by calling Auto-Offset
for a second time after a suitable delay to allow the outputs to settle.

The primary use of the Auto-Offset is to cancel out zero errors which are usually
caused by unwanted coupling or crosstalk between the signal channel and the
reference channel, either in the external connections or possibly under some
conditions in the instrument itself. Note that if a zero error is present, the Auto-Offset
function should be executed before any execution of Auto-Phase.

Auto-Measure
This function only operates when the reference frequency is greater than 1 Hz. It
performs the following operations:

The instrument is set to signal recovery mode, line filter is disabled, AC coupling is
established, the FET input device is selected and the FLOAT mode is set. If the
reference frequency is more than 10 Hz the output time constant is set to 10 ms,
otherwise it is set to the lowest synchronous value, the filter slope is set to
12 dB/octave, output expand is switched off, the reference harmonic mode is set to 1,
the X offset and Y offset functions are switched off and the Auto-Sensitivity and
Auto-Phase functions are called. The Auto-Sensitivity function also adjusts the AC
Gain if required.

The Auto-Measure function is intended to give a quick setting of the instrument which
will be approximately correct in typical simple measurement situations. For optimum
results in any given situation, it may be convenient to start with Auto-Measure and to
make subsequent modifications to individual controls.

NOTE: The Auto Measure function affects the setting of the AC Gain and AC
Gain Automatic controls during execution. Consequently, it may not operate
correctly if the AC Gain Automatic control is turned off. In this case, better
results will be obtained by performing Auto-Sensitivity followed by Auto Phase
functions.

Auto-Default
With an instrument of the design of the model 7260, where there are many controls of
which only a few are regularly adjusted, it is very easy to overlook the setting of one
of them. Consequently an Auto-Default function is provided, which sets all the

3-20
 Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

controls to a defined state. This is most often used as a rescue operation to bring the
instrument into a known condition when it is giving unexpected results. A listing of
the settings which are invoked by the use of this function can be found in appendix F.

This completes the description of the main functional blocks of the instrument.

3.4 General
3.4.01 Accuracy
When the demodulator is operating under correct conditions, the absolute gain
accuracy of the instrument is limited by the analog components in the signal channel,
and the absolute phase accuracy is limited by the analog components in both the
signal channel and the reference channel. The resulting typical accuracy is ±0.2
percent of the full-scale sensitivity and ±0.25 degree respectively. When the higher
values of AC Gain are in use, the errors tend to increase in the upper part of the
frequency range (above 25 kHz).

3.4.02 Power-up Defaults

All instrument settings are retained when the unit is switched off. When the
instrument is switched on again the settings are restored but with the following
exceptions:-

a) The signal channel reverts to AC coupling.

b) The GPIB mask byte is set to zero.
c) The REMOTE parameter is set to zero (front-panel control enabled).
d) The curve buffer is cleared.
e) Any sweep that was in progress at switch-off is terminated.
f) Synchronous time constants are enabled.
g) The display backlight is turned on

3-21
Chapter 3, TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3-22
Front and Rear Panels

Chapter 4

4.1 Front Panel

Figure 4-1, Model 7260 Front Panel Layout

As shown in figure 4-1, there are four BNC connectors with associated LED
indicators, a 64 × 240 pixel backlit LCD display panel, eight double and four single
keys mounted on the model 7260’s front panel. The following sections describe the
function and location of these items.

4.1.01 A and B/I Signal Input Connectors

The A connector is the signal input connector for use in single-ended and differential
voltage mode. The B/I connector is the signal input connector for use in differential
voltage mode (A-B) and for inverting single-ended voltage mode (-B mode). It is also
the signal input connector when current input mode is selected. LEDs adjacent to the
connectors light continuously to indicate which of them is active when a particular
input mode is selected, or flash to indicate that the input is in overload (see
figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2, Signal Inputs

4-1
Chapter 4, FRONT AND REAR PANELS

4.1.02 OSC OUT Connector

This is the output connector for the internal oscillator. When internal reference mode
is selected the LED adjacent to the connector will be lit (see figure 4-3).

4.1.03 REF IN Connector

This is the input connector for a general purpose external reference signal
> 300 mHz. If external reference operation at lower frequencies is required, the REF
TTL input on the rear panel should be used. When external reference mode is
selected the LED adjacent to the connector will be lit (see figure 4-3). Under unlock
conditions the LED will flash.

Figure 4-3, OSC OUT and REF IN Connectors

4.1.04 LCD Display Panel

This panel and the four pairs of keys on each side of it are used to adjust the
instrument’s controls and display the measured outputs, by the use of a series of
menus. The model 7260 is a very sophisticated instrument with many features and
consequently had the traditional approach of using one button per control been
adopted the front panel would have needed to be made very large. Adopting a menu-
based control and display system, with the function of each key being dependent on
the displayed menu, allows the instrument to be made much more compact and
additionally controls which need to be changed only occasionally can be hidden in
normal use.

The eight pairs of keys have the following functions, depending on the displayed
menu.

Function 1: To adjust the setting of a control.

If a control, such as time constant, full-scale sensitivity, or input coupling mode is
displayed on the screen then the adjacent key pair is used to adjust its setting.

Some controls, such as AC Gain and full-scale sensitivity, have only a limited range
of settings, and so the use of the and keys allows the required value to be

4-2
 Chapter 4, FRONT AND REAR PANELS

chosen with only a few key-presses. Other controls, such as the internal oscillator
amplitude and frequency, may be set over a wide range of values and to a high
precision. In these cases a significant number of key-presses are required to make
adjustments.

Adjustment of the latter type of control is made easier by the use of either or all of the
three methods described below.

Auto Repeat
If an or key is pressed and held, then its action is automatically repeated
such that the displayed control setting will increment or decrement at a rate
approximately ten times faster than can be achieved by repeated manual key-
presses.

Active Cursor
The keys can be used initially to place a cursor over a given digit in the displayed
control setting, prior to changing that digit. This is done by using the procedure
described below.

Step 1 Press both the and keys simultaneously. In the example shown in
figure 4-4 the internal oscillator frequency is to be adjusted, since this is
the control displayed adjacent to the keys. A cursor appears under one of
the displayed digits (see also figure 4-5).

Step 2 With the cursor visible, repeating step 1 causes the cursor to move to the
left. When the cursor reaches the most significant digit available (left end
of control setting) the next key-press returns the cursor to the least
significant digit (right end of control setting). Continue this action until
the cursor is under the required digit.

Step 3 Press the or key to change the digit to the required value.

Figure 4-4, Active Cursor Activation

As an example of this operation, suppose that the oscillator frequency is 50 kHz

and it is required to change it to 51 kHz. Simultaneously press both and
keys adjacent to the oscillator frequency display. Move the cursor, by repeated
double-key presses, until it is under the required digit, in this case the zero to the

4-3
Chapter 4, FRONT AND REAR PANELS

right of the leading 5. Then press the key to increment the frequency by
1 kHz. The cursor will disappear as soon as the frequency is adjusted but its
position remains active until changed (see figure 4-5).

Figure 4-5, Active Cursor Operation

The double-key press action can also be performed with one finger by firmly
pressing the center of the key rocker which will deform to press both keys.
The active cursor can be used to set any particular digit. For example, if you only
want to adjust the reference phase in 1 degree steps leave the cursor over the first
digit to the left of the decimal point of the reference phase value.

Control Zeroing
Any control may be set to zero, e.g. the oscillator frequency may be set to
0.000 Hz, by pressing and holding both sides of the adjacent key
simultaneously until the control display changes to zero.

Function 2: To Select a Menu or Sub-Menu

When the display adjacent to a key pair displays a menu name, then pressing
either the or key selects that menu.

Function 3: To Execute a Pre-Programmed Function

When the display adjacent to a key pair displays a pre-programmed function,
such as Auto-Measure or start frequency sweep, then pressing either the or
key executes that function.

4.1.05 HELP Key

The model 7260 includes context-sensitive on-screen help. In many menus, pressing
the HELP key followed by a key adjacent to any displayed control or menu selection
provides information about that control or menu.

If information is required on other topics, then pressing HELP twice, when in the
Main Display, accesses the main Help menu, from which the required subject may be
obtained by pressing the relevant key.

To exit the Help screens and return to normal operation press the HELP key again.

4-4
 Chapter 4, FRONT AND REAR PANELS

4.1.06 MENU Key

The model 7260 is controlled by a series of on-screen menus. When the Main
Display, which is used to adjust up to four selected controls and to display the
instrument outputs, is shown the MENU key is used to access the Main Menu, from
which other menus may be accessed. Pressing the MENU key a second time returns
the display to the Main Display.

The structure of the menus is fully discussed in chapter 5.

4.1.07 DISP Key

This key provides convenient single-button access to the menu in which the user may
choose which three out of the possible thirteen basic instrument controls, including
those such as full-scale sensitivity, time constant and oscillator frequency, may be
directly adjusted from the Main Display.

Once these controls have been selected, pressing the DISP key a second time returns
to the Main Display.

4.1.08 SET Key

This key updates all frequency-dependent parameters within the lock-in amplifier.
This key should be pressed, when using external reference modes, after any change to
the external reference frequency.

4.2 Rear Panel

Figure 4-6, Model 7260 Rear Panel Layout

As shown in figure 4-6, the line power switch, line power voltage selector, two
RS232 connectors, a GPIB (IEEE-488) connector, digital output port, preamplifier
power connector and fifteen BNC signal connectors are mounted on the rear panel of
the instrument. Brief descriptions of these are given in the following text.

4-5
Chapter 4, FRONT AND REAR PANELS

4.2.01 Line Power Switch

Press the end of the switch marked I to turn on the instrument’s power, and the other
end marked O to turn it off.

4.2.02 Line Power Input Assembly

This houses the line voltage selector and line input fuse. To check, and if necessary
change, the fuse or line voltage see the procedure in section 2.1.05.

4.2.03 RS232 Connector

This 9-pin D type RS232 interface connector implements pins 1, 2, 3 and 7 (Earth
Ground, Transmit Data, Receive Data, Logic Ground) of a standard DTE interface.
To make a connection to a PC-compatible computer, it is normally sufficient to use a
three-wire cable connecting Transmit Data to Receive Data, Receive Data to
Transmit Data, and Logic Ground to Logic Ground. Appendix D shows the
connection diagrams of cables suitable for computers with 9-pin and 25-pin serial
connectors. Pinouts for this connector are given in appendix B.

4.2.04 AUX RS232 Connector

This connector is used to link other compatible EG&G equipment together in a
“daisy-chain” configuration. Up to an additional 15 units can be connected in this
way. Each unit must be set to a unique address (see section 5.3.22). Pinouts for this
connector are given in appendix B.

4.2.05 GPIB Connector

The GPIB interface connector conforms to the IEEE-488 1978 Instrument Bus
Standard. The standard defines all voltage and current levels, connector
specifications, timing and handshake requirements.

4.2.06 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Connector

This connector provides eight TTL output lines, each of which can be set high or low
by the use of the Digital Port menu or via the computer interfaces. It is most
commonly used for controlling auxiliary apparatus, such as lamps, shutters and
heaters. Pinouts for this connector are given in appendix B.

4.2.07 PREAMP POWER Connector

This connector supplies ±15 V at up to 100 mA and can be used for powering any of
several optional remote preamplifiers available from EG&G Instruments. Pinouts for
this connector are given in appendix B.

4.2.08 REF MON Connector

The signal at this connector is a TTL-compatible waveform synchronous with the
reference. This output monitors correct reference channel operation but its polarity is
not uniquely defined so that it does not necessarily show the correct phase

4-6
 Chapter 4, FRONT AND REAR PANELS

relationship with the SIG MON output.

4.2.09 REF TTL Connector

This connector is provided to allow TTL-compatible pulses to be used as the
reference input. At reference frequencies < 300 mHz, it should always be used in
preference to the REF IN connector on the front panel.

4.2.10 ADC3 Connector

This is the input connector for the third analog-to-digital converter (ADC) which uses
a voltage-to-frequency converter (VFC) followed by a counter to implement the
conversion. The VFC is driven by the signal at this connector, which should be
limited to a full-scale range of ±10.0 V. The value returned by the converter and
viewed on the ADC3 menu or returned in response to a computer command is
proportional to the integral of the voltage waveform for the specified sampling time.

4.2.11 SIG MON Connector

The signal at this connector is that immediately prior to the main analog-to-digital
converter and after the preamplifier, line filter and anti-alias filters.

4.2.12 CH1 and CH2 Connectors

The signal at these connectors is an analog voltage corresponding to a selected
output, such as X, Y, R, θ, etc., as specified in the User Options 1 menu. The
minimum time constant that can be used is 5 ms. The full-scale output voltage range
is ±10.0 V although the outputs remain valid to ±12.0 V to provide some overload
capability.

4.2.13 TRIG Connector

This connector accepts a TTL-compatible input and can be used for triggering the
auxiliary analog-to-digital converters (ADCs). The input operates on the positive
edge only.

4.2.14 ADC1 and ADC2 Connectors

The input voltages at these connectors may be digitized using the auxiliary ADCs and
read either from the front panel or by the use of a computer command. The input
voltages are sampled and held when the ADC is triggered, and several different
trigger modes are available. These modes can be set either from the front panel or by
using a remote computer command. The input voltage range is ±10.0 V and the
resolution is 1 mV.

4.2.15 DAC1, DAC2, DAC3 and DAC4 Connectors

There are four digital-to-analog converter (DAC) output connectors. The output
voltages at these connectors can be set either from the front panel or by the use of
remote computer commands. The output range is ±10.0 V and the resolution is 1 mV.

4-7
Chapter 4, FRONT AND REAR PANELS

4.2.16 FAST X and FAST Y Connectors

The signals at these two connectors are the X channel and Y channel output signals
derived from a point after the first stage of output low-pass filtering. The range of
time constants that can be used is from 10 µs to 640 µs, with a fixed slope of 6 dB/
octave. Visual interpretation of the waveforms at these connectors, as displayed on an
oscilloscope, when the instrument is operating in the highband mode (i.e. above
60 kHz) or in dual reference or dual harmonic modes is difficult.

4-8
Front Panel Operation

Chapter 5

5.1 Introduction
This chapter describes how to operate the model 7260 using the front panel controls,
and discusses its capabilities when used in this way. Chapter 6 provides similar
information in the situation where the unit is operated remotely using one of the
computer interfaces.

It is assumed that readers are already familiar with the use of the front panel and
keys, but if not then they should refer to the detailed description of their operation
given in chapter 4.

The model 7260 uses a flexible, menu-based, control structure which allows many
instrument controls to be adjusted from the front panel with only a few keys.
Furthermore this design makes it very easy to introduce new features or improve
existing ones without the restrictions which would result from a fixed front panel
layout.

The instrument may be operated in one of four modes, as follows:-

Single Reference
This is the normal operating mode of the unit, where it functions as a conventional
dual phase lock-in amplifier. It includes both internal and external reference modes
and provides detection either at the reference frequency or one harmonic of it. Signal
recovery or vector voltmeter modes may be used.

Virtual Reference
Virtual reference mode is an extension of internal single reference mode operation,
where the Y channel output is used to make continuous adjustments to the internal
oscillator frequency and phase to achieve phase-lock with the applied signal such that
the X channel output is maximized and the Y channel output is zeroed. Virtual
reference mode operation is only possible with signals at frequencies between 100 Hz
and 60 kHz.

Dual Reference
In dual reference mode the model 7260 can make simultaneous measurements at two
different reference frequencies, one of which is external and the other is derived from
the internal oscillator. The maximum frequency for either reference is 20 kHz.

Dual Harmonic
Dual harmonic mode allows the simultaneous measurement of two different
harmonics of the input signal. As with dual reference mode, the maximum frequency
for either harmonic is 20 kHz.

5-1
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The sections which follow describe the menus as they appear when the unit is being
used in single reference mode. The menus range from the Main Display, used most of
the time for instrument control and display of data, through to those menus accessing
controls which typically only need changing occasionally.

The menus for the other three operating modes are then described, since in some cases
these differ from those used in single reference mode to accommodate the additional
controls and displays that are needed.

5.2 Menu Structure

Figure 5-1 shows the basic structure of the main instrument control menus which, it
will be seen, has a hierarchical, or “tree”, structure.

Figure 5-1, Main Menu Structure

In the diagram, although not in the rest of this manual, the following syntax is used:-
The menus are shown as boxes, with menu names in Gothic typeface, e.g. MAIN
MENU. Front-panel keys are shown in bold sans serif typeface, as they appear on the
front panel, e.g. DISP and MENU. Arrows on the lines connecting the menus and the
text adjacent to them indicate the keys which need to be pressed to move between
menus.

The following examples should make this clear.

To access the Main Menu from the Main Display, press the MENU key on the front
panel once; to return to the Main Display from the Main Menu, press the MENU key
once more.

To access the Communications menu from the Main Display, press the MENU key

5-2
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

on the front panel followed by the key adjacent to the word Communications shown in
the Main Menu; to return to Main Menu press the Previous Menu key on the
Communications menu.

Note that all menus, with the exception of the Display Options menu, provide a
Previous Menu choice allowing the user to return one step up the menu “tree”. In
addition, when in any menu, pressing the MENU key on the front panel provides a
direct return to the Main Display.

Some menus, such as the Oscillator menu, have further sub-menus which are
discussed later. These have been omitted from figure 5-1 for the sake of clarity.

5.3 Menu Descriptions - Single Reference Mode

5.3.01 Main Display

Figure 5-2, Main Display - Single Reference Mode

The Main Display always appears on power-up and is similar to that shown in
figure 5-2 above. It is divided into two sections by a single vertical line. Four
instrument controls appear on the left-hand side, of which one, AC Gain, is always
displayed, whereas the other three are user-specified using the Display Setup menu,
discussed later in section 5.3.02. On the right-hand side, four instrument outputs are
displayed in one of the three following formats:-

a) Two large numeric and two bar-graphs

b) Four bar-graphs
c) Two large and two small numeric displays

The display mode is selected via the Display Options menu, discussed later in section
5.3.27. However, for any given display mode, the choice of the output that will
actually be shown in each of the four positions is made using the corresponding right-
hand keys. In single reference mode, there are eleven possible outputs to
choose from for each display in numerical form, with seven choices for the bar-graph
displays, as listed in table 5-1.

5-3
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Output Description
Title
Numeric Displays Only:
R% Resultant (Magnitude) output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
θ° Phase output in degrees
X X channel output in volts or amps
Y Y channel output in volts or amps
R Resultant (Magnitude) output in volts or amps
N Noise output in volts or amps per root hertz
xxxx Hz Reference frequency in hertz

Numeric & Bar-Graph Displays:

X% X channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
Y% Y channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
N% Noise output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
ADC1 ADC1 input, ±10.000 V full-scale
ADC2 ADC2 input, ±10.000 V full-scale

Bar-Graph Displays Only:

MAG% Magnitude output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
PHA Phase output, full-scale = ±200°

Table 5-1, Output Display Choices - Single Reference Mode

The instrument provides a means of switching quickly between the following pairs of
outputs, simply by pressing simultaneously both ends of the keys adjacent to
their description:-

X %fs ßà X volts or amps

Y %fs ßà Y volts or amps
R %fs ßà R volts or amps
Noise %fs ßà Noise volts/√Hz or amps/√Hz

AC GAIN
The AC Gain control is always displayed in the top left-hand corner of the Main
Display. If the AC Gain control is set to Manual (using the Signal Channel menu -
see section 5.3.04), then this control allows it to be adjusted from 0 dB to 90 dB in
10 dB steps, although not all settings are available at all full-scale sensitivity
settings. If it is set to Automatic, then the control cannot be adjusted, but the present
value of AC Gain is still displayed. In either mode, changing the full-scale sensitivity
may result in a change to the AC Gain.

To obtain the best accuracy, use the highest value of AC Gain that is possible without
causing signal overload. The Input Limit value, displayed immediately under the AC
Gain control, is the largest value of rms signal that may be applied without causing
signal overload.

5-4
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.02 Display Setup Menu

The three user-specified controls on the Main Display may be chosen from those
available by pressing the DISP key on the front panel. The Display Setup menu
appears, as shown in figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3, Display Setup Menu

Press the keys adjacent to each of the three control descriptions on the left-
hand side until the required controls are selected. Note that it is not possible to display
the same control in more than one position simultaneously.

The available controls have the following functions:-

SEN (Full-scale sensitivity)

When set to voltage input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s
full-scale voltage sensitivity may be set to any value between 2 nV and 1 V in a 1-2-5
sequence.

When set to current input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s full-
scale current sensitivity may be set to any value between 2 fA and 1 µA (wide
bandwidth mode) or 2 fA and 10 nA (low-noise mode), in a 1-2-5 sequence.

The number reported after the letters DR is the instrument’s Dynamic Reserve,
expressed in decibels, as calculated by the following equation:-

 2 
DR = 20 × log 10   − ACGain (in dB)
 SEN 

Example:-

If AC Gain = 10 dB and SEN = 2 mV then

 2 
DR = 20 × log 10  − 10
 0.002 

DR = 50 dB

5-5
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

TC (Time Constant)
The time constant of the output filters is set using this control. Settings between 10 µs
and 640 µs are in a binary sequence and apply only to the FAST X and FAST Y
outputs on the rear panel. Settings between 5 ms and 100 ks are in a 1-2-5 sequence
and apply to all the other instrument outputs.

OSC xxxx Hz (Oscillator Frequency)

The frequency of the instrument’s internal oscillator may be set, using this control, to
any value between 1 mHz and 250 kHz with a 1 mHz resolution. Adjustment is faster
if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

OSC xxxx V (Oscillator Amplitude)

The amplitude of the instrument’s internal oscillator may be set, using this control, to
any value between 1 mV and 5 V rms with a 1 mV resolution. Adjustment is faster if
use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

DAC1 to DAC4
These four controls set the voltage appearing at the DAC1 to DAC4 output
connectors on the rear panel to any value between +10 V and -10 V with a resolution
of 1 mV. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section
4.1.04.

XOF and YOF (X channel and Y channel output offsets)

These are the manual X channel and Y channel output offset controls. The offset
levels set by these controls, which can be any value between -300 % and +300 % in
0.01 % steps, are added to the X channel or Y channel outputs when the X channel or
Y channel offsets are switched on using the Output Channels menu. Adjustment is
faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

The values are set automatically by the Auto-Offset function. Note that the Auto-
Offset function automatically switches on both X and Y channel output offsets.

FRQ (Reference Frequency Display)

Although not a control, it is possible to display the current reference frequency on the
left-hand side of the display by selecting this option. Naturally, when this is done the
adjacent keys have no effect.

PHA (Reference Phase)

This control allows the reference phase to be adjusted over the range -180° to +180°
in 10m° steps. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see
section 4.1.04.

The Auto-Phase function also affects the setting of this control.

QUAD (Reference Phase Quadrant)

This control allows the reference phase to be adjusted in steps of ±90°.

The Auto-Phase function also affects the setting of this control.

Once the required controls have been selected, press the DISP key on the front panel
to return to the Main Display.

5-6
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.03 Main Menu

When in the Main Display, press the MENU key on the front panel once to access the
Main Menu, which is shown in figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4, Main Menu

The Main Menu is used to access all of the remaining instrument controls via a series
of sub-menus, which are selected simply by pressing the key adjacent to the required
menu. These sub-menus are described in the following sections.

5.3.04 Signal Channel Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Signal Channel item
accesses the Signal Channel menu, which is shown in figures 5-5 and 5-6.

Figure 5-5, Signal Channel Menu - Voltage Input Mode

Figure 5-6, Signal Channel Menu - Current Input Mode

5-7
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The Signal Channel menu has seven controls affecting the instrument’s signal input
channel. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the adjacent
keys, with the currently active selection being highlighted.

Coupling
There are two independent switchable coupling modes, AC or DC and Float or
Ground, as follows:-

AC
The voltage inputs are AC coupled

DC
The voltage inputs are DC coupled. Note that DC coupling should be used at
frequencies of < 1 Hz.

FLOAT
The shells of the A and B/I connectors are connected to chassis ground via a
1 kΩ resistor.

GROUND
The shells of the A and B/I connectors are connected directly to chassis ground.

Input
The upper pair of Input controls is used to select voltage or current input mode and
depending on this mode, the input connectors or current conversion ratio which will
used.

V (Voltage input mode)

In this setting the signal channel input is a voltage input, and the menu appears as in
figure 5-5. It is connected according to the setting of the corresponding right-hand
input control, as follows:-

A
The signal channel input is a single-ended voltage input to the BNC connector on
the front panel marked A.

-B
The signal channel input is an inverting single-ended voltage input to the BNC
connector on the front panel marked B/I.

A-B
In this setting the signal channel input is a differential voltage input connected to
the BNC connectors on the front panel marked A and B/I.

i (Current input mode)

In this setting the signal channel input is a current input, and the menu appears as in
figure 5-6. The current-to-voltage converter may be switched to low-noise or wide
bandwidth settings depending on the corresponding right-hand input control, as
follows:-

5-8
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

WIDE B/W (Wide Bandwidth Converter)

In this setting the signal channel input is a single-ended current input connected to
the BNC connector on the front panel marked B/I, and uses a wide bandwidth
current-to-voltage converter.

LOW NOISE (Low Noise Converter)

In this setting the signal channel input is a single-ended current input connected to
the BNC connector on the front panel marked B/I, and uses a low-noise current-
to-voltage converter.

Input
The left-hand of the lower pair of input controls selects the voltage mode input
device. It has no effect when operating in current input mode. Operation is as
follows:-

FET (FET input device)

Uses a FET as the input device, for which case the input impedance is 10 MΩ.
This is the usual setting.

BIPOLAR (Bipolar input device)

Uses a bipolar device in the input stage, for the lowest possible voltage input
noise. In this case the input impedance is 10 kΩ. Note that this selection is not
possible when using the AC-coupled input modes.

The right-hand of the lower pair of input controls selects the mode of operation of the
line frequency rejection filter.

Early instruments have two possible settings for this control, ON or OFF. Note that in
these units the filter introduces significant gain and phase errors when measuring
signals in the frequency range from 5 Hz to 500 Hz.

Instruments manufactured after June 1996 which are fitted with updated filter
hardware offer four possible settings for the control, as defined by the following
table:-

Legend Function
OFF Line filter inactive
F Enable 50 or 60 Hz notch filter
2F Enable 100 or 120 Hz notch filter
F&2F Enable both filters

The final control on the Signal Channel menu selects whether or not the Automatic
AC Gain function is active.

As discussed in section 3.3.04, the correct adjustment of the AC Gain in a DSP lock-
in amplifier is necessary to achieve the best results. This control allows the user to
select whether this adjustment is carried out automatically or remains under manual
control.

5-9
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

AUTO AC GAIN OFF

In this setting the AC Gain may be manually adjusted from the Main Display.

AUTO AC GAIN ON
In this setting the AC Gain value is automatically selected by the instrument,
depending on the full-scale sensitivity.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5.3.05 Reference Channel Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Reference Channel
item accesses the Reference Channel menu, which is shown in figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7, Reference Channel Menu

The Reference Channel menu has seven controls affecting the instrument’s reference
channel. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the adjacent
keys.

REF PHASE (Reference Phase)

This control, which duplicates the Main Display PHA control, allows the reference
phase to be adjusted over the range -180° to + 180° in 10m° steps. Adjustment is
faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

The Auto-Phase function also affects the setting of this control.

HARMONIC (Reference Harmonic)

This control allows selection of the harmonic of the reference frequency at which the
lock-in amplifier will detect. It can be set to any value between 1st and 65535, but
most commonly is set to 1st. Note that the “2F” setting found on other lock-in
amplifiers corresponds to setting this control to 2nd. Adjustment is faster if use is
made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

REFERENCE (Reference Source)

This control allows selection of the source of reference signal used to drive the
reference circuitry, and has two settings:-

5-10
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

INT
The lock-in amplifier’s reference is taken from the instrument’s internal oscillator.
Note that this setting gives the best phase and gain measurement accuracy under
all operating conditions, and it is always to be preferred, if possible, to design the
experiment so that the lock-in amplifier acts as the source of the reference signal.

EXT
In this setting the reference channel is configured to accept a suitable external
reference source. The actual connector which should be used for this reference is
set by the EXT SOURCE control.

EXT SOURCE
This control has two settings and is used to specify the connector to which the
external reference source is connected.

FP (Front Panel)
In this setting, which is suitable for use with reference frequencies above
300 mHz, the lock-in amplifier’s reference should be applied to the REF IN
connector on the front panel. A wide variety of signal waveforms may be
employed but at frequencies lower than 1 Hz, square waveforms should be used.

RP (Rear Panel)
In this setting, the lock-in amplifier’s reference should be applied to the TTL-
compatible REF TTL connector on the rear panel. The use of this input is
preferable to the front panel input when a TTL logic reference signal is available.
This setting should always be used when operating with external reference
frequencies < 300 mHz.

AUTO PHASE
Pressing a key adjacent to the Auto Phase item performs a single Auto-Phase
operation. This control duplicates the Auto Phase control on the Auto Functions
menu, and its operation is more fully discussed in section 5.3.20

+/- 90°
This control, which duplicates the Main Display QUAD control, allows the reference
phase to be adjusted in steps of ±90°.

Sig Rec Mode/Vector VM Mode

This control allows the instrument to be switched from the default Signal Recovery
mode to Vector Voltmeter mode, which may give slightly better phase accuracy when
measuring clean signals. These two modes are discussed further in section 3.2.02.
Note that the instrument always reverts to Signal Recovery mode on power-up.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5-11
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.06 Output Channels Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Output Channels
item accesses the Output Channels menu, which is shown in figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8, Output Channels Menu

The Output Channels menu has seven controls affecting the instrument’s X channel
and Y channel outputs. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using
the adjacent keys, with the currently active selection being highlighted.

X OFFSET and Y OFFSET

These controls, which duplicate the Main Display XOF and YOF controls, allow
manual adjustment of the X channel and Y channel output offsets. The offset level set
by the controls, which can be any value between -300 % and +300 % in 0.01 % steps,
is added to the X channel or Y channel output when the X channel or Y channel offset
is switched on. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see
section 4.1.04.

The values are set automatically by the Auto-Offset function. Note that the Auto-
Offset function automatically switches both X channel and Y channel output offsets
on.

OFFSET
This control allows the X channel and Y channel output offsets, set by the above level
controls, to be switched on to either or both outputs, or to be switched off. It therefore
has four settings, as follows:-

X OFF, Y OFF
Both X channel and Y channel output offsets are switched off.

X ON, Y OFF
The X channel output offset is switched on.

X OFF, Y ON
The Y channel output offset is switched on.

X ON , Y ON
Both X channel and Y channel output offsets are switched on.

5-12
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

EXPAND
This control allows a ×10 output expansion to be applied to the X, Y or both output
channels, or to be switched off:-

X OFF, Y OFF
Output expansion is turned off.

X ON, Y OFF
A ×10 output expansion is applied to the X channel output only.

X OFF, Y ON
A ×10 output expansion is applied to the Y channel output only.

X ON, Y ON
A ×10 output expansion is applied to both the X channel and Y channel outputs.

TC (Time Constant)
This control, which duplicates the Main Display TC control, is used to set the time
constant of the output filters. The settings between 10 µs and 640 µs are in a binary
sequence and apply only to the FAST X and FAST Y outputs on the rear panel.
Settings between 5 ms and 100 ks are in a 1-2-5 sequence and apply to all of the other
instrument outputs.

SLOPE
The roll-off of the output filters is set, using this control, to any value from 6 dB to
24 dB/octave, in 6 dB steps. Note this control does not affect the roll-off of the
FAST X and FAST Y outputs which are fixed at 6 dB/octave.

TCs (Time Constant Mode)

This control has two settings, as follows:-

TCs SYNC (Synchronous Time Constants)

In this setting, the actual time constant used is chosen to be some multiple of the
reference frequency period. This mode provides an output which will be much
more stable at low frequencies than it would otherwise be. Note that, depending
on the reference frequency, output time constants shorter than 100 ms cannot be
used.

TCs ASYNC (Asynchronous Time Constants)

In this setting, which is the normal mode, time constants are not related to the
reference frequency period.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5-13
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.07 Oscillator Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Oscillator item
accesses the Oscillator menu, which is shown in figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9, Oscillator Menu

The Oscillator menu has three controls affecting the instrument’s internal oscillator,
and is also used for accessing two sub-menus which control oscillator frequency and
amplitude sweeps. The relationship of these menus to the Main Menu is shown in
figure 5-10. Note that as with the main menu structure, shown in figure 5-1, it is
possible to return to the Main Display from any menu by pressing the MENU key on
the front panel, but this has been omitted from figure 5-10 for the sake of clarity.

Figure 5-10, Oscillator Menu Structure

Changes to the setting of the controls on the Oscillator menu can be made by using
the adjacent keys.

FREQUENCY
This control, which duplicates the Main Display OSC control, allows the instrument’s
internal oscillator frequency to be set to any value between 1 mHz and 250 kHz with
a 1 mHz resolution. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control -
see section 4.1.04.

5-14
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

AMPLITUDE
This control, which duplicates the Main Display OSC control, allows the instrument’s
internal oscillator amplitude to be set to any value between 1 mV and 5 V rms with a
1 mV resolution. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see
section 4.1.04.

SYNC OSC (Synchronous Oscillator Output)

This control has two settings, ON and OFF, which are only meaningful when the lock-
in amplifier is operated in external reference mode:-

ON
When the Synchronous Oscillator is switched ON and the instrument is operating
in External Reference mode, the signal at the OSC OUT connector changes from
that of the internal oscillator to an analog representation of the drive from the
reference channel to the X channel output demodulator. The amplitude of this
signal may be controlled by the internal oscillator amplitude controls, but the
internal oscillator frequency control has no effect since the frequency is related to
the external reference.

For example, if the harmonic mode is set to 1st, the signal at the OSC OUT
connector will be at the same frequency as the applied reference, but if it is set to
any other harmonic then the output will be at that harmonic of the reference
frequency. Note that at high output frequencies ( > 20 kHz) the output update rate
is apparent - see section 3.3.09.

OFF
When the Synchronous Oscillator is switched OFF the OSC OUT connector
functions as the output from the internal oscillator. The signal provided at it may
be adjusted both in amplitude and frequency using the instrument’s controls. This
is the most common setting.

The Oscillator menu is also used to access two sub-menus, as follows:-

5.3.08 Frequency Sweep Menu

When the Oscillator menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Frequency
Sweep Setup item accesses the Frequency Sweep menu, which is shown in
figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11, Frequency Sweep Menu

5-15
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The Frequency Sweep menu has seven controls affecting the instrument’s internal
oscillator. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the adjacent
keys, with the currently active selection being highlighted.

When a frequency sweep is run, the internal oscillator frequency starts at the defined
start frequency and is changed in discrete steps until it reaches the stop frequency.
Steps may be of equal size, which gives a linear relationship of output frequency to
time, or may be proportional to the present frequency, which gives a logarithmic
relationship. The controls operate as follows:-

START FREQ
This control defines the start frequency for the frequency sweep, which may be set to
any value between 1 mHz and 250 kHz to a 1 mHz resolution. Adjustment is faster if
use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

STOP FREQ
This control defines the stop frequency for the frequency sweep, which may be set to
any value between 1 mHz and 250 kHz to a 1 mHz resolution. Adjustment is faster if
use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

STEP SIZE
This control defines the amount by which the oscillator frequency is changed at each
step. Depending on the sweep law selected (linear or logarithmic) it is set either in
hertz, or as a percentage of the present frequency. If Start Frequency > Stop
Frequency then the output frequency will decrease with time.

STEP RATE
This control defines the time that the oscillator frequency remains at each step of the
complete frequency sweep. Values between 50 ms and 100 s may be set to a 5 ms
resolution. Note that the step rate defined here also applies to oscillator amplitude
sweeps - see section 5.3.09.

ARMED
When this control is set to YES, one or more of the following controls will be
displayed.

START
Pressing the adjacent key starts the frequency sweep. The display changes
to give two options, Stop and Pause.

STOP
Pressing the adjacent key stops the frequency sweep.

PAUSE
Pressing the adjacent key pauses the frequency sweep at the present
frequency. The display changes to Continue.

CONTINUE
Pressing the adjacent key restarts the paused frequency sweep from the
present frequency. The display changes to Pause.

5-16
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Note that if the oscillator amplitude sweep is also armed (see section 5.3.09) then
pressing Start on the Frequency Sweep menu will also start the amplitude sweep. The
armed control cannot be changed when a sweep is in progress.

LAW
This control defines the relationship of output frequency to time for the frequency
sweep, and has three options:-

LIN
Selects a linear relationship.

LOG
Selects a logarithmic relationship. When in this mode, the frequency is defined in
terms of a percentage of the current frequency. For example, if the step size were
set to 10 %, the start frequency to 1 kHz and the stop frequency to 2 kHz, then
the frequencies generated during the sweep would be:-

1000.000 Hz
1100.000 Hz
1210.000 Hz
1331.000 Hz
1464.100 Hz
1610.510 Hz
1771.561 Hz
1948.717 Hz
2000.000 Hz

SEEK
This is the same as the linear sweep mode, except that the sweep stops
automatically as soon as the signal magnitude exceeds 50 % of the current full-
scale sensitivity. It is used during setting up of the virtual reference mode - see
section 5.4.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Oscillator
menu.

5-17
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.09 Amplitude Sweep Menu

When the Oscillator menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Amplitude
Sweep Setup item accesses the Amplitude Sweep menu, which is shown in
figure 5-12.

Figure 5-12, Amplitude Sweep Menu

The Amplitude Sweep menu has six controls affecting the instrument’s internal
oscillator. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the adjacent
keys, with the currently active selection being highlighted.

When an amplitude sweep is run, the internal oscillator output starts at the defined
start amplitude and is changed in discrete steps until it reaches the stop amplitude.
Steps are always of equal size, giving a linear relationship of output amplitude to
time. The controls operate as follows:-

START AMP
This control defines the start amplitude for the amplitude sweep, which may be set to
any value between 0.000 V rms and 5.000 V rms to a 1 mV resolution. Adjustment is
faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

STOP AMP
This control defines the stop amplitude for the amplitude sweep, which may be set to
any value between 0.000 V rms and 5.000 V rms to a 1 mV resolution. Adjustment is
faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

STEP SIZE
This control defines the amount by which the oscillator amplitude is changed at each
step. It may be set to any value between 0.000 V rms and 5.000 V rms to a 1 mV
resolution. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see
section 4.1.04.

If Start Amp > Stop Amp then the oscillator amplitude will decrease with time.

STEP RATE
This control defines the time that the oscillator amplitude remains at each step of the
complete amplitude sweep. Values between 50 ms and 100 s may be set to a 5 ms
resolution. Note that the step rate defined here also applies to oscillator frequency
sweeps - see section 5.3.08.

5-18
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

ARMED
When this control is set to YES, one or more of the following controls will be
displayed.

START
Pressing the adjacent key starts the amplitude sweep. The display changes
to give two options, Stop and Pause.

STOP
Pressing the adjacent key stops the amplitude sweep.

PAUSE
Pressing the adjacent key pauses the amplitude sweep at the present
amplitude. The display changes to Continue.

CONTINUE
Pressing the adjacent key restarts the paused amplitude sweep from the
present amplitude. The display changes to Pause.

Note that if the oscillator frequency sweep is also armed (see section 5.3.08) then
pressing Start on the Amplitude Sweep menu will also start the frequency sweep. The
armed control cannot be changed when a sweep is in progress.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Oscillator
menu.

5.3.10 User Options 1 Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the User Options 1 item
accesses the User Options 1 menu, which is shown in figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13, User Options 1 Menu

The User Options 1 menu has two controls which are used to select the outputs to be
provided at the CH1 and CH2 connectors on the rear panel. This menu is also used
for accessing five sub-menus, some of which have further sub-menus and all of which
have further instrument controls. The relationship of these menus to the Main Menu
is shown in figure 5-14. Note that as with the main menu structure, shown in
figure 5-1, it is possible to return to the Main Display from any menu by pressing the
MENU key on the front panel, but this has been omitted from figure 5-14 for the sake
of clarity.

5-19
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Figure 5-14, User Options 1 Menu Structure

Changes to the setting of the controls on the User Options 1 menu can be made by
using the adjacent keys.

CH1/CH2
These two controls define which instrument output will be converted to an analog
voltage and made available at the CH1 and CH2 connectors on the rear panel. The
following ten options are available:-

X% (10V fs)
When set to X % (10V fs) the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear
panel will output a voltage related to the X %fs front panel display as follows:-

X % (10V fs) CH1/2 Voltage

+120 12.0 V
+100 10.0 V
0 0.0 V
-100 -10.0 V
-120 -12.0 V

Y% (10V fs)
When set to Y % (10V fs) the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear
panel will output a voltage related to the Y %fs front panel display as follows:-

5-20
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Y % (10V fs) CH1/2 Voltage

+120 12.0 V
+100 10.0 V
0 0.0 V
-100 -10.0 V
-120 -12.0 V

MAG% (10V fs)

When set to MAG % (10V fs) the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear
panel will output a voltage related to the MAG %fs or R % front panel displays
as follows:-

MAG %fs CH1/2 Voltage

+120 12.0 V
+100 10.0 V
0 0.0 V
-100 -10.0 V
-120 -12.0 V

PHASE (+9 V = +180°)

(-9 V = -180°)
When in this setting the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear panel will
output a voltage related to the PHA or θ front panel displays as follows:-

PHA or θ deg CH1/2 Voltage

+180 9.0 V
+90 4.5 V
0 0.0 V
-90 -4.5 V
-180 -9.0 V

PHASE (+9 V = +360°)

(-9 V = 0°)
When in this setting the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear panel will
output a voltage related to the PHA or θ front panel display as follows:-

PHA or θ deg CH1/2 Voltage

+360 +9.0 V
+180 0.0 V
0 -9.0 V

NOISE (10V fs)

When set to NOISE the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear panel will
output a voltage related to the N %fs front panel display as follows:-

N %fs CH1/2 Voltage

+120 12.0 V
+100 10.0 V
0 0.0 V
-100 -10.0 V
-120 -12.0 V

5-21
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

RATIO
When set to RATIO the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear panel will
output a voltage related to the result of the RATIO calculation, which is defined
as follows:-

 X output 
RATIO =  
 ADC1 Input 

where X output is the X channel output with +10 V = 100 % full-scale sensitivity
and ADC 1 is the voltage applied to the ADC1 input connector on the rear panel.
Hence, for example, if the instrument were measuring a 100 mV signal when set
to the 500 mV sensitivity setting, the X channel output were maximized and a 1 V
signal were applied to the ADC1 input, then the value of RATIO would be:-

 0.1 
 10 × 
RATIO =  0.5 
 1.000 
 
 
RATIO = 2

The relationship between the voltage at the CH1/CH2 connector and the RATIO
value is defined as follows:-

RATIO CH1/2 Voltage

+12 12.0 V
+10 10.0 V
0 0.0 V
-10 -10.0 V
-12 -12.0 V

LOG RATIO
When set to LOG RATIO the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear
panel will output a voltage related to the LOG RATIO calculation, which is
defined as follows:-

 X output 
LOG RATIO = log 10 
 ADC1 input 

where X output is the X channel output with +10 V = 100 % full-scale sensitivity
and ADC 1 input is the voltage applied to the ADC1 input connector on the rear
panel. Hence, for example, if the instrument were measuring a 100 mV signal
when set to the 500 mV sensitivity setting, the X channel output were maximized
and a 1 V signal were applied to the ADC1 input, then the value of LOG RATIO
would be:-

5-22
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

 0.1 
 10 × 
LOG RATIO = log 10  0.5 
 1.000 
 
 
LOG RATIO = 0.301

The relationship between the voltage at the CH1/CH2 connector and the LOG
RATIO value is defined as follows:-

LOG RATIO CH1/2 Voltage

+3.000 3.000 V
0 0.0 V
-3.000 -3.000 V

Note: If RATIO < 0 then LOG RATIO = -3.000

EQUATION #1
When set to EQUATION #1 the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear
panel will output a voltage related to Equation 1, which is defined using the
Equation 1 menu (see section 5.3.11), as follows:-

EQUATION #1 CH1/2 Voltage

+12000 12.0 V
+10000 10.0 V
0 0.0 V
-10000 -10.0 V
-12000 -12.0 V

EQUATION #2
When set to EQUATION #2 the corresponding CH1/CH2 connector on the rear
panel will output a voltage related to Equation 2, which is defined using the
Equation 2 menu (see section 5.3.11), as follows:-

EQUATION #2 CH1/2 Voltage

+12000 12.0 V
+10000 10.0 V
0 0.0 V
-10000 -10.0 V
-12000 -12.0 V

5-23
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.11 Equation #1 / Equation #2 Setup Menus

When the User Options 1 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Equation
#1 Setup or Equation #2 Setup items accesses the Equation #1 or Equation #2 Setup
menus, one of which is shown in figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15, Equation #1 Setup Menu

The Equation setup menus are used to define more complex calculations on the
instrument outputs than are possible using the basic ratio and log ratio options. There
are two user-defined equations, Equation #1 and Equation #2, which are setup using
the relevant setup menus. The equations take the following form:-

 (A ± B) × C 
Equation =  
 D 

where the operator “±” may be set to either addition or subtraction, and the variables
A, B, C and D can be chosen from the following list:-

Variable Range
X ±30000
Y ±30000
MAG 0 to +30000
PHA (Phase) ±18000
ADC1 ±10000
ADC2 ±10000
C1 0 to 100000
C2 0 to 100000
FRQ (Frequency) 0 to 250000000

The select keys are used to highlight the required variable, and then the adjust
keys are used to change it.

The values C1 and C2 are user-defined integer constants and are adjusted using the
two controls on the lower left-hand side of the display.

The calculation is performed using 64-bit integers to maintain full accuracy through
to the 32-bit result that is displayed immediately below the equation and is constantly
updated. Care must be taken in defining the equations so as to make the best use of
the available output range.

5-24
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

If the equation outputs are set to appear at the CH1 or CH2 connectors on the rear
panel using the User Options 1 menu, then the output range should be adjusted to lie
in the range -12000 to +12000. Values outside this range will result in these analog
outputs limiting at ±12.000 V, although the digital value will still appear correctly on
the display and can be read via the computer interfaces.

Note that the equations continue to be calculated even when the Equation Setup
menus are not displayed.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the User
Options 1 menu.

5.3.12 DACs & ADCs Menu

When the User Options 1 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the DACs &
ADCs item accesses the DACs & ADCs menu, which is shown in figure 5-16.

Figure 5-16, DACs & ADCs Menu

The DACs & ADCs menu has four controls, which are used to set the voltages
appearing at the DAC1, DAC2, DAC3 & DAC4 connectors on the rear panel, and
keys to access two further sub-menus.

DAC1, DAC2, DAC3 and DAC4

These four controls set each of the voltages appearing at the DAC1, DAC2, DAC3
or DAC4 connector on the rear panel to any value between -10.000 V and +10.000 V
in 1 mV increments. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control -
see section 4.1.04.

5-25
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.13 ADC1 & 2 Options Menu

When the DACs & ADCs menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the ADC1&2
Options item accesses the ADC1 & 2 Options menu, which is shown in figure 5-17.

Figure 5-17, ADC1 & 2 Options Menu

The ADC1 & 2 Options menu has one control, which is used to set the trigger mode
for the analog-to-digital conversion of the voltages applied to the ADC1 and ADC2
connectors on the rear panel, and two displays for the current value of these two
voltages.

TRIG (ADC Trigger Mode Control)

This has ten possible settings, as follows:-

5ms (200Hz)
A conversion is performed on both ADC1 and ADC2 every 5 ms and the results
are displayed on the ADC1 & 2 Options menu and are available via the computer
interfaces.

EXTERNAL (RP)
A conversion is performed on both ADC1 and ADC2 on receipt of a rising edge
at the TTL TRIG connector on the rear panel. The maximum trigger rate is
400 Hz. The results are displayed on the ADC1 & 2 Options menu and are
available via the computer interfaces.

BURST ADC1
A burst of conversions at approximately 40 kHz is performed on ADC1 only,
either on receipt of the TADC2 computer command or when the Trigger Burst
Mode key is pressed. The results are stored to the curve buffer, with the number
of conversions being set by the curve length control on the Curve Buffer menu -
see section 5.3.15.

BURST ADC1&2
A burst of conversions at approximately 13 kHz is performed on both ADC1 and
ADC2, either on receipt of the TADC3 computer command or when the Trigger
Burst Mode key is pressed. The results are stored to the curve buffer, with the
number of conversions being set by the curve length control on the Curve Buffer
menu - see section 5.3.15.

5-26
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

BURST ADC1 (T)

This is the same as the BURST ADC1 mode, except that the sampling rate may
be set using the Rate control and that the computer command to initiate
acquisition is TADC4.

BURST ADC1 & 2 (T)

This is the same as the BURST ADC1 & 2 mode, except that the sampling rate
may be set using the Rate control and that the computer command to initiate
acquisition is TADC5.

BURST ADC1 (RP)

This is the same as the BURST ADC1 mode, except that acquisition is initiated
on receipt of a rising edge at the TTL TRIG connector on the rear panel.

BURST ADC1 & 2 (RP)

This is the same as the BURST ADC1 & 2 mode, except that acquisition is
initiated on receipt of a rising edge at the TTL TRIG connector on the rear panel.

BURST ADC1 (RP T)

This is the same as the BURST ADC1 (T) mode, except that acquisition is
initiated on receipt of a rising edge at the TTL TRIG connector on the rear panel.

BURST ADC1 & 2 (RP T)

This is the same as the BURST ADC1 & 2 (T) mode, except that acquisition is
initiated on receipt of a rising edge at the TTL TRIG connector on the rear panel.

NOTE: When any of the burst acquisition modes are selected, the instrument
automatically changes the curves selected for storage, as shown on the Curve
Select menu (section 5.3.16), to be either ADC1 or ADC1 and ADC2.

TRIGGER BURST MODE

When one of the triggered burst modes is selected, this control is displayed. Press the
key adjacent to it to trigger data acquisition.

RATE
When one of the timed burst modes is selected, the rate control is active. The number
displayed, n, sets the sample rate according to the following equations:-

When storing only to ADC1:

(i.e. BURST ADC1 (T), BURST ADC1 (RP) and BURST ADC1 (RP T)

 16,000,000 
Sample Rate =   Hz
 ((25 × n) + 157 

5-27
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

When storing to ADC1 and ADC 2:

(i.e. BURST ADC1 & 2 (T), BURST ADC1 & 2 (RP) and
BURST ADC1 & 2 (RP T)

 16,000,000 
Sample Rate =   Hz
 ((25 × n ) + 1031 

Note that these equations apply only to units manufactured after December 1995.
Earlier instruments used a 16.384 MHz instead of a 16.0 MHz crystal, so the above
equations should be modified accordingly by replacing the 16,000,000 figure with
16,384,000.

For convenience, the result of this calculation is shown on the display.

For example, when n = 20, the sample rate will be 24,353 Hz for ADC1 when the
instrument has a 16.0 MHz crystal, and 24,937 Hz when it has a 16.384 MHz
crystal.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the DACs &
ADCs menu.

5.3.14 ADC3 Options Menu

When the DACs & ADCs menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the ADC3
Options item accesses the ADC 3 menu, which is shown in figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18, ADC 3 Menu

ADC 3 is an integrating converter whose response is proportional to the sample time.

The full-scale response with a 1 s sample time is nominally ±500000 for ±10.000 V
input, and the full-scale response with a 100 ms sample time is nominally ±50000.
The ADC 3 menu has one control, which is used to set this sample time, and a display
of the current value of this integral.

SAMPLE TIME
This control allows the sample time to be set to any value between 10 ms and 2.000 s
in 10 ms increments. Converter resolution is proportional to sample time, so that
when the sample time is 10 ms a full-scale response is equivalent to 13 bits
(12 bit + sign) of accuracy, whereas with a sample time of 1.05 s the accuracy is 20
bits (19 bit + sign).

5-28
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the DACs &
ADCs menu.

5.3.15 Curve Buffer Menu

When the User Options 1 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Curve
Buffer item accesses the Curve Buffer menu, which is shown in figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19, Curve Buffer Menu

The curve buffer menu has four controls affecting the instrument’s internal 32768
point curve buffer, two status indicators and a key to access a further sub-menu, the
Curve Select menu.

RATE
This control defines the interval between each data point in the curve buffer. It may
be set to any value between 5 ms and 1 × 106 s in 5 ms increments. In addition, it may
also be set to 800 Hz, at which setting only the X channel and Y channel outputs are
stored.

NOTE: If set to 800 Hz then the curves selected for storage as shown in the Curve
Select menu (see section 5.3.16) are automatically set to the X channel and Y
channel outputs when an acquisition is started by pressing either the Start Single
Sweep or Start Multi Sweep keys.

LENGTH
This control defines the number of points to be stored in the internal curve buffer
when either single or repetitive sweeps are executed. The buffer can hold a maximum
of 32768 points, shared equally between the curve types as defined by the Curve
Select menu. Hence, for example, if 16 curve types are to be stored then the
maximum curve length for each curve is 2048 points.

Note that if the number of curves to be stored is increased beyond that which may be
stored at the current curve length, then the curve length is reduced automatically.

# STORED
This shows the number of points stored in the curve buffer. The number is
incremented at the rate defined by the Rate control. On completion of a sweep, in
single-sweep mode, the number will be the same as the Length control, whereas in
multi-sweep mode the number increments continuously.

5-29
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

# SWEEPS
This shows the number of completed sweeps, where one sweep is equal to the Length
control setting. On completion of a sweep, in single-sweep mode, the number will be
“1”, whereas in multi-sweep mode the number increments continuously.

START SINGLE SWEEP

This key initiates a single sweep. If the Length control is greater than 1 and a single
sweep is in progress, then the controls change to Pause Single Sweep and Stop Single
Sweep.

PAUSE SINGLE SWEEP

This key stops data acquisition at the current point, but acquisition may be restarted
by pressing Cont. Single Sweep.

CONT. SINGLE SWEEP

This key restarts data acquisition from the current point.

STOP SINGLE SWEEP

This key stops data acquisition at the current point. Data already acquired remains in
the curve buffer.

START MULTI SWEEP

This key initiates multiple sweeps. The controls change to Pause Multi Sweep and
Stop Multi Sweep.

PAUSE MULTI SWEEP

This key stops data acquisition at the current point, but acquisition may be restarted
by pressing Cont. Multi Sweep.

CONT. MULTI SWEEP

This key restarts data acquisition from the current point.

STOP MULTI SWEEP

This key stops data acquisition at the current point. Data already acquired remains in
the curve buffer.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the User
Options 1 menu.

5-30
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.16 Curve Select Menu

When the Curve Buffer menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Curve
Select item accesses the Curve Select menu, which is shown in figure 5-20.

Figure 5-20, Curve Select Menu

The upper section of the Curve Select menu has a list of sixteen possible data types
that can be stored to the curve buffer, arranged in four rows of four columns. Three
controls allow between one and sixteen of these data types to be selected for storage,
with those that are selected being indicated by a tick mark and by being shown in
reverse text.

MOVE POINTER *
This control allows the * pointer to be moved to any one of the possible data types.

ENTER SELECTION / CLEAR SELECTION

If the data type adjacent to the * pointer is not selected, then pressing this key causes
it to be selected, as indicated by a tick mark adjacent to it and by its being displayed
in reverse text. If it is already selected, then pressing the key deselects it.

CBD = x
An alternative way of selecting curves is to use the CBD control. The number is the
same as that used with the CBD computer command (see section 6.4.09).

NOTE: The data types selected for storage may be changed by controls on other
menus, as follows:-

ADC1&2 Options Menu (section 5.3.13)

Selecting any of the burst acquisition modes automatically selects the ADC1 or
ADC1 and ADC2 outputs for storage.

Curve Buffer Menu (section 5.3.15)

Setting the Rate control to 800 Hz and starting an acquisition by pressing either
the Start Single Sweep or Start Multi Sweep keys automatically selects the X
channel and Y channel outputs for storage.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Curve Buffer
menu.

5-31
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.17 User Options 2 Menu

When the User Options 1 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the User
Options 2 item accesses the User Options 2 menu, which is shown in figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21, User Options 2 Menu

The User Options 2 menu has one control, which is used to adjust the sampling rate
of the instrument’s main analog to digital converter, keys to access two sub-menus,
and keys to change the operating mode of the instrument. The relationship of the sub-
menus to the User Options 1 menu is shown in figure 5-22. Note that as with the main
menu structure, shown in figure 5-1, it is possible to return to the Main Display from
the User Options 1, User Options 2 and Main Menus by pressing the MENU key on
the front panel, but this has been omitted from figure 5-22 for the sake of clarity.
However the Single Graph and Double Graph menus do not have a Previous Menu
key, so the MENU key is used to leave these menus and return to the User Options 2
menu.

Figure 5-22, User Options 2 Menu Structure

SAMPLE RATE
This control allows the sampling rate of the main ADC to be adjusted to one of four
values near 166 kHz, to remove problems caused by aliasing of interfering signals
into the output passband (see also section 3.3.06).

FIRMWARE VERSION xxxx

This line reports the version number of the instrument’s operating firmware.

5-32
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The Virtual Reference, Dual Reference and Dual Harmonic modes are discussed later
in sections 5.4, 5.5 and 5.6 respectively.

5.3.18 Single Graph Menu

When the User Options 2 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Single
Graph item accesses the Single Graph menu, which is shown in figure 5-23.

Figure 5-23, Single Graph Menu

The Single Graph menu plots the data of one curve stored in the curve buffer. This
allows real-time or post-acquisition display of selected instrument outputs in “strip
chart” format, and has a cursor which allows accurate determination of the output
value at a given sample point.

If there is no data in the curve buffer then the graph will show a straight line
representing zero. If curve storage is already running, or if there is data in the curve
buffer, then a curve will be displayed with the most recent value at the right-hand side
of the screen.

Figure 5-23 shows the layout of the Single Graph menu. The curve is displayed in the
central section of the display, with the keys on either side being used to adjust the
axes and to select the data to be shown, as follows:-

SCALE keys
The top and bottom left-hand keys are used to adjust the upper and lower
limits of the vertical axis to a 1 % resolution, with the set maximum and minimum
values being shown adjacent to them.

AUTO SCALE keys

The two middle pairs of left-hand keys are used to autoscale the upper and
lower limits of the vertical axis to match the range present in the visible section of the
displayed curve.

There is no facility for adjusting the x-axis scale, which always shows up to 156
points. Hence if a curve of more than this number of points is acquired it will not be
possible to show all of the points on the display at the same time.

5-33
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Curve Selection keys

The keys on the top right-hand side of the display are used to select the curve to be
shown from those stored in the curve buffer. All curves that can be stored may be
selected for display, except for EVENT, the two curves recording the reference
frequency (FRQ0 and FRQ1) and the curves recording instrument sensitivity settings.
For example, if only X DATA and Y DATA curves were specified, using the Curve
Select sub-menu, as being required then these would be the only two selections
available.

LOOP/STOP and ONE SHOT/PAUSE/CONTINUE keys

In the single graph display mode, acquisition to the curve buffer, and hence display of
data, can be initiated using the middle two right-hand keys. The upper pair
start data acquisition in the loop mode, in which the curve buffer fills to capacity and
is then sequentially overwritten by new data. Once this mode is running, the Loop
control key annotation changes to Stop, and pressing the adjacent key will then stop
acquisition at the present data point.

The lower pair also start acquisition, but in the one-shot mode. This causes data to be
acquired for the number of points specified by the curve length control in the Curve
Buffer menu and once complete, acquisition ceases. During data acquisition, the
control key annotation changes to Pause; if pressed again, acquisition will pause at
the current data point and the annotation changes again to Cont. (Continue). If the
key is pressed again acquisition continues from the present data point.

CURSOR keys
The bottom right-hand keys move the displayed cursor, which is only active
when data is not being stored, from side to side. The present point number is shown in
the bottom right-hand corner of the display and the value of the curve at its
intersection with the cursor appears in the top right-hand corner. Where applicable,
values are always given as a percentage of full-scale, since there is no facility to
display them in floating-point format. If the cursor is moved fully to the left then the
displayed data scrolls to the right in groups of ten points, allowing earlier data to be
shown.

If acquisition is in progress then the cursor is automatically positioned at the right-

hand side of the display area and cannot be moved.

Pressing the MENU key on the front panel exits the Single Graph menu and returns
to the User Options 2 menu.

5-34
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.19 Double Graph Menu

When the User Options 2 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Double
Graph item accesses the Double Graph menu, which is shown in figure 5-24.

Figure 5-24, Double Graph Menu

The double graph display is similar to that of the single graph with the exception that
one shot data acquisition cannot be initiated. If this mode of acquisition is required
then it can be started from either the Single Graph or Curve Buffer menus prior to
selecting Double Graph.

If there is no data in the curve buffer then the graph will show two horizontal straight
lines representing zero. If curve storage is already running, or if there is data in the
curve buffer, then two curves will be displayed with the most recent values at the
right-hand side of the screen.

Figure 5-24 shows the layout of the double graph display. The two curves are
displayed in the central section of the display, with the keys on either side being used
to adjust the axes and to select the data to be shown, as follows:-

SCALE keys
The keys to the left-hand side of the display are used to set the upper and lower limits
of the vertical axis in 1% increments, with the top and upper-middle keys
being used for the upper curve (Curve 1) and the lower-middle and bottom
keys for the lower curve (Curve 2). Pressing both sides of one of the key pairs
simultaneously automatically sets the relevant limit to match the range present in the
visible section of the displayed curve.

As in single graph mode, there is no facility for adjusting the x-axis scale, which
always shows up to 156 points. Furthermore both the upper and lower curves are
shown over the same range of points; it is not possible, for example, to show Curve 1
for data points 1 to 156 and Curve 2 for points 201 to 356.

Curve Selection keys

The keys on the top right-hand side of the display are used to select the curve to be
shown in the upper half of the display, Curve 1, from those stored in the curve buffer.
The lower-middle right-hand keys perform an equivalent function for Curve 2, which
is shown in the lower half of the display. All curves that can be stored may be
selected for display, except for EVENT, the two curves recording the reference
frequency (FRQ0 and FRQ1) and the curves recording instrument sensitivity settings.

5-35
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

LOOP/STOP keys
In the double graph display mode only the loop method of data acquisition may be
initiated. The upper-middle right-hand keys are used to start this mode, in which the
curve buffer fills to capacity and is then sequentially overwritten by new data. During
data acquisition, the Loop control key annotation changes to Stop, and pressing the
adjacent key will then stop acquisition at the present data point.

CURSOR keys
As with the single graph mode, the bottom right-hand keys control the position
of the cursor. The current point number is displayed in the bottom right-hand corner
of the display and the value of the curves at their intersection with the cursor appear
above the relevant Curve 1 and Curve 2 data types. Where applicable, values are
always given as a percentage of full-scale, since there is no facility to display them in
floating-point format. If the cursor is moved fully to the left then the displayed data
scrolls to the right in groups of ten points, allowing earlier data to be shown.

Pressing the MENU key on the front panel exits the Double Graph menu and returns
to the User Options 2 menu.

5.3.20 Auto Functions Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Auto Functions
item accesses the Auto Functions menu, which is shown in figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25, Auto Functions Menu

This menu has five controls for activating the auto functions built into the instrument.
Note that once these functions complete, the Auto Functions menu is replaced by the
Main Display. The functions operate as follows:-

AUTO PHASE
In an Auto-Phase operation the value of the signal phase with respect to the reference
is computed and an appropriate phase shift is then introduced into the reference
channel so as to bring the difference between them to zero. The intended result is to
null the output of the Y channel while maximizing the output of the X channel.

Any small residual phase difference can normally be removed by calling Auto-Phase
for a second time after a suitable delay to allow the outputs to settle.

The Auto-Phase facility is normally used with a clean signal which is known to be of
stable phase. It usually gives very good results provided that the X channel and Y

5-36
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

channel outputs are steady when the procedure is called.

If a zero error is present on the outputs, such as may be caused by unwanted coupling
between the reference and signal channel inputs, then the following procedure should
be adopted:-

1) Remove the source of input signal, without disturbing any of the connections to
the instrument signal input which might be picking up interfering signals from the
reference channel. In an optical experiment, for example, this could be done by
shielding the detector from the source of chopped light.

2) Execute an Auto-Offset operation, which will reduce the X channel and Y

channel outputs to zero.

3) Re-establish the source of input signal. The X channel and Y channel outputs will
now indicate the true level of input signal, at the present reference phase setting.

4) Execute an Auto-Phase operation. This will set the reference phase shifter to the
phase angle of the input signal. However, because the offset levels which were
applied in step 2 were calculated at the original reference phase setting, they will
not now be correct and the instrument will in general display a non-zero Y
channel output value.

5) Remove the source of input signal again.

6) Execute a second Auto-Offset operation, which will reduce the X channel and Y
channel outputs to zero at the new reference phase setting.

7) Re-establish the source of input signal.

This technique, although apparently complex, is the only way of removing the effect
of crosstalk which is not generally in the same phase as the required signal.

AUTO OFFSET
In an Auto-Offset operation the X offset and Y offset functions are turned on and are
automatically set to the values required to give zero values at both the X channel and
Y channel outputs. Any small residual values can normally be removed by calling
Auto-Offset for a second time after a suitable delay to allow the outputs to settle.

The primary use of the Auto-Offset is to cancel out zero errors which are usually
caused by unwanted coupling or crosstalk between the signal channel and the
reference channel, either in the external connections or possibly under some
conditions in the instrument itself. Note that if a zero error is present, the Auto-Offset
function should be executed before any execution of Auto-Phase.

AUTO SENSITIVITY
This function only operates when the reference frequency is above 1 Hz. A single
Auto-Sensitivity operation consists of increasing the full-scale sensitivity range if the
magnitude output is greater than 90 % of full-scale, or reducing the range if the
magnitude output is less than 30 % of full-scale. After the Auto-Sensitivity function

5-37
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

is called, Auto-Sensitivity operations continue to be made until the required criterion

is met.

In the presence of noise, or a time-varying input signal, it may be a long time before
the Auto-Sensitivity sequence comes to an end, and the resulting setting may not be
necessarily what is really required.

AUTO MEASURE
This function only operates when the reference frequency is greater than 1 Hz. It
performs the following operations:

The instrument is set to signal recovery mode, line filter is disabled, AC coupling is
established, the FET input device is selected and the FLOAT mode is set. If the
reference frequency is more than 10 Hz the output time constant is set to 10 ms,
otherwise it is set to the lowest synchronous value, the filter slope is set to 12 dB/
octave, output expand is switched off, the reference harmonic mode is set to 1, the X
offset and Y offset functions are switched off and the Auto-Sensitivity and Auto-
Phase functions are called. The Auto-Sensitivity function also adjusts the AC Gain if
required.

The Auto-Measure function is intended to provide a means of setting the instrument

quickly to conditions which will be approximately correct in typical simple
measurement situations. For optimum results in any given situation, it may be
convenient to start with Auto-Measure and to make subsequent modifications to
individual controls.

NOTE: The Auto-Measure function affects the setting of the AC Gain and AC
Gain Automatic controls during execution. Consequently, it may not operate
correctly if the AC Gain Automatic control is turned off. In this case, better
results will be obtained by performing Auto-Sensitivity followed by Auto-Phase
functions.

AUTO DEFAULT
With an instrument of the design of the model 7260, where there are many controls of
which only a few are regularly adjusted, it is very easy to overlook the setting of one
of them. Consequently an Auto-Default function is provided, which sets all the
controls to a defined state. This is most often used as a rescue operation to bring the
instrument into a known condition when it is giving unexpected results. A listing of
the settings which are invoked by the use of this function can be found in appendix F.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5-38
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.21 Communications Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Communications
item accesses the Communications menu, which is shown in figure 5-26.

Figure 5-26, Communications Menu

The Communications menu is used to access five sub-menus, the relationship of

which to the Communications menu is shown in figure 5-27. Note that as with the
main menu structure, shown in figure 5-1, it is possible to return to the Main Display
from any menu by pressing the MENU key on the front panel, but this has been
omitted from figure 5-27 for the sake of clarity.

Figure 5-27, Communications Menu Structure

5-39
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.22 RS232 Comms Menu

When the Communications menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the RS232
Options item accesses the RS232 Comms menu, which is shown in figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28, RS232 Comms Menu

This menu has seven controls affecting the RS232 computer interface, as follows:-

BAUD RATE
This control sets the baud rate to one of the following values:-

Baud Rate (bits per second)

75
110
134.5
150
300
600
1200
1800
2000
2400
4800
9600
19200

DATA BITS
This control sets the data transmission to one of four formats:-

Data Bits Description

7 + 1 PARITY 7 data bits + 1 parity bit
8 + 1 PARITY 8 data bits + 1 parity bit
8 + NO PARITY 8 data bits + 0 parity bit
9 + NO PARITY 9 data bits + 0 parity bit

DELIMITER
The character shown is that sent by the lock-in amplifier to separate two numeric
values in a two-value response, such as that generated by the MP command. The
corresponding ASCII value of this character is also shown in brackets. For example,
value 44 corresponds to a “,” (comma).

5-40
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

RS232 ADDRESS
When more than one compatible instrument is connected in “daisy-chain” fashion by
coupling the AUX RS232 rear panel port on one to the RS232 port on the next, then
this control is used to define the instrument’s RS232 address. All daisy-chained
instruments receive commands but only the instrument currently being addressed will
implement or respond to them, except of course the command that changes the
instrument to be addressed.

ECHO
This control, when switched on, causes the model 7260 to echo each character
received over the RS232 interface back to the controlling computer. The computer
should wait until the echoed character is returned before it sends the next character.
When switched off, character echo is suppressed.

NOTE: Character echo should always be switched on, except when controlling the
instrument from a simple RS232 terminal where operation without it might be
possible.

PARITY
This control sets the parity check polarity when the Data Bits control specifies that a
parity bit should be used. It should be set to match the setting of the controlling
computer.

PROMPT
This control has two settings, as follows:-

PROMPT ON
A prompt character is generated by the model 7260 after each command response
to indicate that the instrument is ready for a new command. The prompt character
is either a “*” or a “?” If a “?” is generated, it indicates that an overload,
reference unlock, parameter error or command error has occurred.

PROMPT OFF
No prompt character is generated.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the
Communications menu.

5-41
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.23 GPIB Comms Menu

When the Communications menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the GPIB
Options item accesses the GPIB Comms menu, which is shown in figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29, GPIB Comms Menu

This menu has four controls affecting the GPIB computer interface and a key for
accessing the Comms Test menu, as follows:-

ADDRESS
This control sets the GPIB communications address to any value between 0 and 31.
Each instrument used on the GPIB bus must have a unique address setting.

TERMINATOR
This has three possible settings, as follows:-

TERMINATOR = [CR],[LF]
A carriage return followed by a line feed are transmitted at the end of a response
string, and in addition the GPIB interface line EOI (end of instruction) is asserted
with the line feed character.

TERMINATOR = [EOI]
The GPIB interface line EOI (end of instruction) is asserted at the end of the
response string. This gives the fastest possible operation since other termination
characters are not needed.

TERMINATOR = [CR]
A carriage return is transmitted at the end of a response string, and in addition the
GPIB interface line EOI (end of instruction) is asserted.

TEST ECHO
When this control is enabled, all transmissions to and from the instrument via the
GPIB interface are echoed to the RS232 interface. Hence if a terminal is connected to
the latter port, it will display any commands sent to the instrument and any responses
generated, which can be useful during program development. When disabled, echoing
does not occur. The control should always be disabled when not using this feature,
since it slows down communications.

5-42
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

SRQ MASK
The instrument has the ability to generate a service request on the GPIB interface, to
signal to the controlling computer that urgent attention is required. The request is
generated when the result of a logical bit-wise AND operation between the Service
Request Mask Byte, set by this control as a decimal value, and the instrument’s
Status Byte, is non-zero. The bit assignments for the Status Byte are as follows:-

Bit Decimal Value Status Byte

0 1 command complete
1 2 invalid command
2 4 command parameter error
3 8 reference unlock
4 16 overload
5 32 new ADC values available
after external trigger
6 64 asserted SRQ
7 128 data available

Hence, for example, if the SRQ mask byte is set to decimal 16 (i.e. bit 4 asserted), a
service request would be generated as soon as an overload occurred; if the SRQ mask
byte were set to 0 (i.e. no bits asserted), then service requests would never be
generated.

Pressing a key next to the Comms Test item accesses the Comms Test menu, and
pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the
Communications menu.

5.3.24 Comms Test Menu

When the Communications menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Comms
Test item accesses the Comms Test menu. It may also be accessed via the GPIB
Comms menu, and is shown in figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30, Comms Test Menu

This menu is useful when attempting to establish communications via the computer
interfaces for the first time, or if a problem is suspected.

The Input side of the display shows all of the characters that have been received from
the interface, whether valid or not. The Output side of the display shows all the
characters that have been generated by the instrument and sent to the interface.

5-43
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

If characters received do not match those sent by the controlling computer then this
indicates that an error has occurred either in the host computer or interface cable. If
the interface cable is known to be good, then re-check either the GPIB or RS232
communications settings.

CLEAR SCREEN
The input and output displays scroll once they are full so that they always display the
most recent characters received and sent. Pressing the Clear Screen key clears both
areas.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to either the
Communications menu or the GPIB Comms menu, depending on how the Comms
Test menu was accessed.

5.3.25 ‘*’ Command Options Menu

When the Communications menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the ‘*’
Command Options item accesses the ‘*’ Command Options menu, shown in
figure 5-31.

Figure 5-31, ‘*’ Command Options Menu

The star data transfer mode, which applies only to the GPIB interface, allows faster
access to a subset of the instrument outputs than is possible using the normal
commands to request the return of output values. The mode can be set up using either
the computer command STAR [n], or via the ‘*’ Command Options menu.

The menu shows eight possible instrument outputs, one of which can be selected. This
output will then be returned when the controlling computer sends an asterisk
character. The required output is selected using the adjacent keys, and its
selection is indicated by being shown in reverse text. Note that when set up using the
computer command an additional four options, allowing transfer of outputs generated
in the dual harmonic and dual reference modes, are also available.

5-44
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.26 Digital Port Menu

When the Communications menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Digital
Port item accesses the Digital Port menu, shown in figure 5-32.

Figure 5-32, Digital Port Menu

The Digital Port menu allows the status of each of the eight pins of the DIGITAL
OUTPUTS connector on the rear panel to be set. This port may be used for
controlling external equipment, for example the switching of heaters or attenuators,
via a suitable user-supplied external interface circuit.

The eight outputs are TTL compatible and are controlled by the digital output port
byte, shown towards the upper right-hand side of the display as D7 - D0. Immediately
under each of these bit-identifiers is a single character showing the current bit status,
which is either a “0”, in which case the output is at logic 0, (i.e. < 0.7 V), or a “1”, in
which case it is at logic 1, (i.e. > 2.4 V).

The four keys on the left-hand side of the display are used to toggle the status
of the bits, the keys being treated for this purpose as eight single keys corresponding
to the eight bit identifiers shown on the left-hand side of the display. Each press of a
given key toggles the status of the corresponding bit.

DECIMAL
This control offers an alternative way of changing the bit status. The number is the
decimal equivalent of the displayed bit pattern, and consequently can be set to any
number between 0 (all bits at logic “0”) and 255 (all bits at logic “1”).

5-45
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.3.27 Display Options Menu

When the Main Menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Display item
accesses the Display Options menu, shown in figure 5-33.

Figure 5-33, Display Options Menu

This menu has four controls affecting the instrument’s display, as follows:-

MODE
This control cycles through the three possible output display types, namely:

a) Two large numeric and two bar-graphs

b) Four bar-graphs
c) Two large and two small numeric displays

The output that actually appears in each of the four display positions is selected using
the corresponding right-hand keys - see section 5.3.01.

CONTRAST
This control adjusts the contrast of the LCD display panel.

BACKLIGHT
This control allows the instrument’s LCD display panel backlight and the front panel
LEDs to be switched on or off.

QUICKVIEW
Pressing this key displays a listing of the settings of the main instrument controls. To
leave this display, press any key.

Press the MENU key on the front panel to return to the Main Display from the
Display Options menu.

This completes the description of the single reference mode menus.

5-46
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.4 Menu Descriptions - Virtual Reference Mode

5.4.01 Virtual Reference Menus
The virtual reference mode is very similar to the single reference mode with internal
reference, and is the simplest of the three additional modes of operation.

NOTE: This mode is only suitable for signals at frequencies between 100 Hz and
60 kHz.

The mode is accessed via two additional sub-menus of the User Options 2 menu, the
relationship of which to the User Options 2 menu is shown in figure 5-34. Note that
as with the main menu structure, shown in figure 5-1, it is possible to return to the
Main Display from any menu by pressing the MENU key on the front panel, but this
has been omitted from figure 5-34 for the sake of clarity. Except as discussed in this
and the following sections, the remainder of the instrument control and display menus
operate in the same way as in single reference mode.

Figure 5-34, Virtual Reference Menu Structure

There are two ways of invoking this mode, the first being via a semi-automatic
sequence, which can be used if the signal to be measured can be acquired with a time
constant of 100 ms or shorter, and the second being a manual technique used in all
other cases.

Semi-Automatic Setup
The first step is to decide what the amplitude of the signal is expected to be. Set the
full-scale sensitivity so that the expected signal is between one and three times the
full-scale sensitivity. For example, if the signal is expected to be about 10 µV then set
the full-scale sensitivity to be either 5 µV or 10 µV.

NOTE: If the full-scale sensitivity is set so that the signal is less than 50 % full-
scale then it will not be found.

Next, go to the User Options 2 menu and press a key adjacent to the Virtual
Reference item. The Virtual Reference (1) menu, shown in figure 5-35, will appear.

5-47
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Figure 5-35, Virtual Reference (1) Menu

This menu has three controls affecting the virtual reference mode, two displays, and
one key to access the Virtual Reference(2) sub-menu.

The controls operate as follows:-

START FREQ
This control defines the start frequency from which the instrument will begin to try to
find the applied signal. It should be set to a value close to, but less than, the expected
signal frequency. If the start frequency is within 100 Hz of the signal frequency then
there is no need to set the stop frequency control.

STOP FREQ
This control defines the stop frequency at which the instrument abandons its search
for the signal, and should be set to a value greater than the expected signal frequency.
If the start frequency is within 100 Hz of the signal frequency then there is no need to
set this control.

OSC FREQ
This displays the present internal oscillator frequency. When a seek frequency sweep
is run the value shown will increase from the defined start frequency until either the
signal magnitude exceeds 50% of full-scale or until the stop frequency is reached.

MAGNITUDE
This displays the present signal magnitude as a percentage of the set full-scale
sensitivity.

START SEARCH
Pressing a key adjacent to the Start Search item starts the internal oscillator at the
defined start frequency and increases it at a rate of 1 Hz per second. If the instrument
detects a signal greater than 50 % of full-scale then the search stops, the unit locks on
to that signal, and the Main Display - Virtual Reference Mode appears, as shown in
figure 5-37.

MANUAL SETUP
This key is used to access the Virtual Reference (2) menu, used for manual setup of
the virtual reference mode, as discussed in the following section.

Manual Setup
If the semi-automatic setup method does not work because the signal requires a time

5-48
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

constant longer than 100 ms then the initial search can be performed manually.

The first step is to decide what the amplitude of the signal is expected to be. Set the
full-scale sensitivity so that the expected signal is between one and three times the
full-scale sensitivity. For example, if the signal is expected to be about 10 µV then set
the full-scale sensitivity to be either 5 µV or 10 µV.

NOTE: If the full-scale sensitivity is set so that the signal is less than 50 % full-
scale then it will not be found.

Set the required time constant and go to the Oscillator menu and from there to the
Frequency Sweep menu. Set the start frequency in the same way as was discussed
above for the semi-automatic setup, set the stop frequency to a value above the signal
frequency and set the sweep law to Seek.

The step size and step rate depend on the time constant. Table 5-2 gives the suggested
values to which these two controls should be set when the output filter slope is set to
12 dB/octave. The slope can be adjusted once the signal has been found.

Time Constant Step Size Step Rate

100 ms 1.000 Hz 1000 ms
200 ms 0.500 Hz 1000 ms
500 ms 0.200 Hz 2000 ms
1s 0.100 Hz 4000 ms
2s 0.050 Hz 8000 ms
5s 0.020 Hz 20000 ms

Table 5-2, Step Size and Step Rate vs Time Constant Setting

Arm the Seek mode and start the frequency sweep, using the Start key. Press the
MENU key on the front panel to return to the Main Display in order to monitor
progress. If and when a signal of greater than 50% of full-scale is found the sweep
will stop.

Once the sweep has stopped, go to the User Options 2 menu and select the Virtual
Reference menu. Select the Manual Setup item and the Virtual Reference (2) menu
will appear, as shown in figure 5-36.

5-49
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.4.02 Virtual Reference (2) Menu

Figure 5-36, Virtual Reference (2) Menu

This menu has three controls affecting the instrument’s full-scale sensitivity, internal
oscillator frequency and time constant, a display of signal magnitude and a key to
activate the virtual reference mode lock.

The controls operate as follows:-

OSC FREQ
This control allows the instrument’s internal oscillator frequency to be set to any
value between 1 Hz and 60 kHz with a 100 mHz resolution.

SEN (Full-scale sensitivity)

When set to voltage input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s
full-scale voltage sensitivity may be set to any value between 2 nV and 1 V in a 1-2-5
sequence.

When set to current input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s full-
scale current sensitivity may be set to any value between 2 fA and 1 µA (wide
bandwidth mode) or 2 fA and 10 nA (low-noise mode), in a 1-2-5 sequence.

TC
This control sets the instrument’s output time constant. It should be set to the value
used for the oscillator frequency sweep during manual setup of the virtual reference
mode.

MAGNITUDE
This displays the present signal magnitude as a percentage of the set full-scale
sensitivity.

VIRTUAL LOCK
When the instrument’s internal oscillator and full-scale sensitivity are set so that the
signal is measured as 50% of full-scale or greater, then pressing this key enters the
virtual reference mode, and the Main Display - Virtual Reference Mode appears, as
shown in figure 5-37.

If the signal frequency is known and the time constant is 1 s or shorter then the
frequency seek step can be bypassed. Go straight to the Virtual Reference (2) menu
and adjust the oscillator frequency control until greater than 50 % full-scale is

5-50
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

reported. Then press the Virtual Lock key to enter virtual reference mode and
complete the procedure.

5.4.03 Main Display - Virtual Reference Mode

Figure 5-37, Main Display - Virtual Reference Mode

In virtual reference mode, the instrument operates exactly as in single reference mode,
with the following exceptions:-

The Main Display always shows the annotation “Virtual Ref” in the bottom right-
hand section of the display as a warning to the user that this mode is being used.

Although the upper three display positions can be reconfigured to display magnitude
and/or phase information, neither of these is relevant since there is no reference signal
to which the phase can be related, and the magnitude equals the X channel output.
Similarly, controls affecting the instrument’s reference phase, such as PHA and
QUAD, have no effect.

Harmonics greater than unity should not be used in virtual reference mode since the
harmonic number relates to the reference frequency. Nevertheless, detection at
harmonics of the signal frequency is possible by searching for the required harmonic
frequency. For example, if the signal frequency is 1 kHz and a measurement at the
second harmonic is required, set the harmonic to 1st and search for a signal at 2 kHz.

The signals at the OSC OUT connector on the front panel and the REF MON
connector on the rear panel are at the virtual reference frequency.

5-51
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.4.04 User Options 2 Menu - Virtual Reference Mode

Figure 5-38, User Options 2 Menu - Virtual Reference Mode

In virtual reference mode, the choices available on the User Options 2 menu are as
shown in figure 5-38. To leave virtual reference mode and return to single reference
mode press a key adjacent to the Exit Virtual Ref item, to switch to dual reference
mode, press a key adjacent to the Dual Reference item, and to switch to dual
harmonic mode, press a key adjacent to the Dual Harmonic item. The remaining
controls operate as already described in section 5.3.17.

This completes the description of the virtual reference mode menus.

5.5 Menu Descriptions - Dual Reference Mode

5.5.01 Dual Reference Setup Menu
The dual reference mode allows the model 7260 to measure signals, applied to the
signal input, at two different reference frequencies simultaneously. During dual
reference mode operation, some of the control and display menus differ from those
used for single reference mode, so these are described in the following sections. The
remaining menus operate as for single reference mode, and are described in
section 5.3.

When the User Options 2 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Dual
Reference item activates the dual reference mode. While the instrument switches to
this mode, the Dual Reference Setup menu is displayed, as shown in figure 5-39.

Figure 5-39, Dual Reference Setup Menu

5-52
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.5.02 Dual Reference Main Display

Once dual reference mode has been activated, the Main Display - Dual Reference
Mode is displayed, as shown in figure 5-40.

Figure 5-40, Main Display - Dual Reference Mode

In dual reference mode the controls, on the left-hand side of the Main Display, which
relate to the reference channel apply only to the reference derived from the external
reference input, which in this mode is called reference1. Controls applying to the
second reference, that from the internal oscillator, known as reference2, are accessed
via the Dual Reference menu. This menu is described later in section 5.5.03.

Since the instrument is now generating two sets of outputs (one for each reference)
there are more output display choices in this mode than in single reference mode, and
these are listed in table 5-3. The outputs corresponding to the two references are
identified by the suffices “1” and “2” respectively.

The additional outputs may be stored to the curve buffer, but only when the curve
selection is made via the computer interface. The Curve Select menu only allows
selection of the same sixteen data types as are available in single reference mode.

When in dual reference mode, the user-defined equations, specified on the Equation
#1 Setup and Equation #2 Setup menus, allow the selection of the additional outputs
as variables. Hence, for example, it is possible to calculate a value proportional to the
ratio of the X1 channel output to that of the X2 channel output. With suitable scaling,
this can even be output to the CH1 or CH2 connectors on the rear panel as an analog
voltage.

Naturally, the two signals share a common signal path and hence controls affecting
the signal channel, such as AC Gain and the line filter controls, apply to both signals.
Although the full-scale sensitivity setting can be independently set for both signals,
the maximum AC Gain that is possible depends on the greater of these two values.
In dual reference mode the maximum detection frequency for either
(reference1 × harmonic1) or reference2 is 20 kHz.

5-53
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Output Description
Title
Numeric Displays Only:
R1% Resultant (Magnitude) output, reference1, %fs
R2% Resultant (Magnitude) output, reference2, %fs
θ1° Phase output, reference1, in degrees
θ2° Phase output, reference2, in degrees
X1 X1 channel output in volts or amps
X2 X2 channel output in volts or amps
Y1 Y1 channel output in volts or amps
Y2 Y2 channel output in volts or amps
R1 Resultant (Magnitude) output, reference1, in volts or amps
R2 Resultant (Magnitude) output, reference2, in volts or amps
N Noise output, reference1, in volts or amps per root hertz
xxxx Hz Reference1 (external) frequency in hertz

Numeric & Bar-Graph Displays:

X1% X1 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
X2% X2 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
Y1% Y1 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
Y2% Y2 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
N% Noise output, reference1, as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
ADC1 ADC1 input, ±10.000 V full-scale
ADC2 ADC2 input, ±10.000 V full-scale

Bar-Graph Displays Only:

MAG1% Resultant (Magnitude) output, reference1, %fs
MAG2% Resultant (Magnitude) output, reference2, %fs
PHA1 Phase output, reference1, full-scale = ±200°
PHA2 Phase output, reference2, full-scale = ±200°

Table 5-3, Output Display Choices - Dual Reference Mode

NOTE: It is not possible to measure or display the noise at the reference2

frequency.

5.5.03 Dual Reference Channel Menu

In dual reference mode, the two reference channels are controlled by the Dual
Reference Channel menu, which replaces the Reference Channel menu used in the
other three modes. In addition, controls are needed for the corresponding output
channels, and so there are now two Output Channel menus. The relationship of these
menus to the Main Menu is shown in figure 5-41. Note that as with the main menu
structure, shown in figure 5-1, it is possible to return to the Main Display from any
menu by pressing the MENU key on the front panel, but this has been omitted from
figure 5-41 for the sake of clarity.

5-54
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Figure 5-41, Dual Reference Mode Menu Structure

In dual reference mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Reference Channel item on the
Main Display accesses the Dual Reference Channel menu, shown in figure 5-42.

Figure 5-42, Dual Reference Channel Menu

The Dual Reference Channel menu has four controls affecting the instrument’s two
reference channels. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the
adjacent keys.

EXT PHASE1 (Reference1 Phase)

This control, which duplicates the Main Display PHA control, allows the reference1
phase to be adjusted over the range -180° to +180° in 10m° steps. Adjustment is
faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

The Auto-Phase1 function (see section 5.5.06) also affects the setting of this control.

INT PHASE2 (Reference2 Phase)

This control allows the reference2 phase to be adjusted over the range -180° to +180°
in 10m° steps.

The Auto-Phase2 function (see section 5.5.06) also affects the setting of this control.

5-55
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

HARMONIC1 (Reference Harmonic)

This control allows selection of the harmonic of the reference1 frequency at which the
lock-in amplifier will detect. It can be set to any value between 1st and 65535, but
most commonly is set to 1st. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor
control - see section 4.1.04.

Detection is always at the fundamental frequency of reference2, i.e. at the same

frequency as that generated by the internal oscillator. There is no provision for
detecting at its harmonics.

EXT SOURCE
This control has two settings and is used to specify the connector to which the
external reference1 source is connected.

FP (Front Panel)
In this setting, which is suitable for use with reference1 frequencies above
300 mHz, the lock-in amplifier’s reference1 should be applied to the REF IN
connector on the front panel. A wide variety of signal waveforms may be
employed but at frequencies lower than 1 Hz, square waveforms should be used.

RP (Rear Panel)
In this setting, the lock-in amplifier’s reference1 should be applied to the TTL-
compatible REF TTL connector on the rear panel. The use of this input is
preferable to the front panel input when a TTL logic reference signal is available.
This setting should always be used when operating with external reference1
frequencies less than 300 mHz.

Sig Rec Mode/Vector VM Mode

This control should always be left set to Sig Rec Mode (signal recovery mode).

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5.5.04 Ext Output Channel (1) Menu

When in dual reference mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Output Channels item on
the Main Menu accesses the Ext Output Channel (1) menu, shown in figure 5-43.

Figure 5-43, Ext Output Channel (1) Menu

The Ext Output Channel (1) menu has six controls affecting the instrument’s outputs
generated by the reference1 channel and a key to access the Int Output Channel (2)

5-56
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

menu. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the adjacent
keys.

The controls operate as follows:-

X1 OFFSET and Y1 OFFSET

These controls, which duplicate the Main Display XOF and YOF controls, allow
manual adjustment of the X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets. The offset level
set by the controls, which can be any value between -300 % and +300 % in 0.01 %
steps, is added to the X1 channel or Y1 channel output when the X1 channel or Y1
channel offset is switched on. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor
control - see section 4.1.04.

The values are set automatically by the Auto-Offset1 function. Note that the Auto-
Offset1 function automatically switches both X1 channel and Y1 channel output
offsets on.

OFFSET
This control allows the X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets, set by the above
level controls, to be switched on to either or both outputs, or to be switched off. It
therefore has four settings, as follows:-

X1 OFF, Y1 OFF
Both X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets are switched off.

X1 ON, Y1 OFF
The X1 channel output offset is switched on.

X1 OFF, Y1 ON
The Y1 channel output offset is switched on.

X1 ON , Y1 ON
Both X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets are switched on.

TC1 (Time Constant)

This control, which duplicates the Main Display TC control, is used to set the time
constant of the output filters. The range of possible settings is 10 ms to 100 ks in a
1-2 -5 sequence and applies to all instrument outputs other than those at the FAST X
and FAST Y connectors on the rear panel. In dual reference mode the signals at these
connectors are complex and generally unsuitable for further use.

SLOPE1
The roll-off of the output filters for the output channels corresponding to reference1 is
set using this control to any value from 6 dB to 24 dB/octave, in 6 dB steps.

TCs (Time Constant Mode)

This control has two settings, as follows:-

TCs SYNC (Synchronous Time Constants)

In this setting, the actual time constant used is chosen to be some multiple of the

5-57
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

reference frequency period. In this mode the output will be much more stable at
low frequencies than it would otherwise be. Note that, depending on the reference
frequency, output time constants shorter than 100 ms cannot be used.

TCs ASYNC (Asynchronous Time Constants)

In this setting, the normal mode, time constants are not related to the reference
frequency period.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5.5.05 Int Output Channel (2) Menu

In dual reference mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Int Output Channel (2) item on
the Ext Output Channel (1) menu accesses the Int Output Channel (2) menu, shown
in figure 5-44.

Figure 5-44, Int Output Channel (2) Menu

The Int Output Channel (2) menu has six controls affecting the instrument’s outputs
generated by the reference2 channel and one display function. Changes to the setting
of these controls can be made by using the adjacent keys.
The controls operate as follows:-

X2 OFFSET and Y2 OFFSET

These controls allow manual adjustment of the X2 channel and Y2 channel output
offsets. The offset level set by the controls, which can be any value between -300 %
and +300 % in 0.01 % steps, is added to the X2 channel or Y2 channel output when
the X2 channel or Y2 channel offset is switched on. Adjustment is faster if use is made
of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

The values are set automatically by the Auto-Offset2 function. Note that the Auto-
Offset2 function automatically switches both X2 channel and Y2 channel output
offsets on.

OFFSET
This control allows the X2 channel and Y2 channel output offsets, set by the above
level controls, to be switched on to either or both outputs, or to be switched off. It
therefore has four settings, as follows:-

5-58
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

X2 OFF, Y2 OFF
Both X2 channel and Y2 channel output offsets are switched off.

X2 ON, Y2 OFF
The X2 channel output offset is switched on.

X2 OFF, Y2 ON
The Y2 channel output offset is switched on.

X2 ON, Y2 ON
Both X2 channel and Y2 channel output offsets are switched on.

SEN2 (Full-scale Sensitivity - reference2 channel)

When set to voltage input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s
full-scale voltage sensitivity for the reference2 channel may be set by this control to
any value between 2 nV and 1 V in a 1-2-5 sequence.

When set to current input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s full-
scale current sensitivity for the reference2 channel may be set by this control to any
value between 2 fA and 1 µA (wide bandwidth mode) or 2 fA and 10 nA (low-noise
mode), in a 1-2-5 sequence.

The setting may be changed by the Auto-Sen2 function.

The number reported after the letters DR is the instrument’s Dynamic Reserve,
expressed in decibels and is calculated by the equation given in section 5.3.02.

TC2 (Time Constant)

This control is used to set the time constant of the output filters corresponding to
reference2. The range of possible settings is 10 ms to 100 ks in a 1-2-5 sequence and
applies to all instrument outputs other than those at the FAST X and FAST Y
connectors on the rear panel. In dual reference mode the signals at these connectors
are complex and generally unsuitable for further use.

SLOPE2
The roll-off of the output filters for the output channels corresponding to reference2 is
set using this control to any value from 6 dB to 24 dB/octave, in 6 dB steps.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Ext Output
Channel (1) menu.

5-59
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.5.06 Auto Functions Menu

In dual reference mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Auto Functions item on the
Main Menu accesses the Auto Functions menu, shown in figure 5-45.

Figure 5-45, Auto Functions Menu - Dual Reference Mode

This menu has seven controls for activating the auto functions built into the
instrument. Note that once these functions complete, the Auto Functions menu is
replaced by the Main Display. There are three auto functions for each of the two
reference channels, which operate exactly as described for single reference mode in
section 5.3.20. Although there is no Auto-Measure function, the same result may be
achieved by executing Auto-Sensitivity followed by Auto-Phase operations.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Auto-Default item carries out an Auto-Default

operation and resets the instrument to single reference mode.

5.5.07 User Options 2 Menu - Dual Reference Mode

Figure 5-46, User Options 2 Menu - Dual Reference Mode

In dual reference mode, the choices available on the User Options 2 menu, shown in
figure 5-46, are different to those available when in the other three modes. To leave
virtual reference mode and return to single reference mode press a key adjacent to the
Single Reference item and to switch to dual harmonic mode, press a key adjacent to
the Dual Harmonic item. The remaining controls operate as already described in
section 5.3.17.

This completes the description of the dual reference mode menus.

5-60
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.6 Menu Descriptions - Dual Harmonic Mode

5.6.01 Dual Harmonic Setup Menu
The dual harmonic mode allows the model 7260 to measure signals, applied to the
signal input, at two different harmonics of the reference frequency simultaneously.
The reference may be either externally supplied or derived from the internal oscillator.
During dual harmonic mode operation, some of the control and display menus differ
from those used for single reference mode, so these are described in the following
sections. The remaining menus operate in the same way as in single reference mode,
as already described in section 5.3.

When the User Options 2 menu is displayed, pressing a key adjacent to the Dual
Harmonic item activates the dual harmonic mode. While the instrument switches to
this mode, the Dual Harmonic Setup menu is displayed, as shown in figure 5-47.

Figure 5-47, Dual Harmonic Setup Menu

5.6.02 Dual Harmonic Main Display

Once dual harmonic has been activated, the Main Display - Dual Harmonic Mode is
displayed, as shown in figure 5-48.

Figure 5-48, Main Display - Dual Harmonic Mode

In dual harmonic mode, the controls on the left-hand side of the Main Display which
relate to the reference channel apply only to the harmonic1 of the reference. Controls
applying to the second harmonic, known as harmonic2, are accessed via the Reference
Channel menu. This menu differs from that used in single reference mode and is
described later in section 5.6.03.

5-61
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Since the instrument is now generating two sets of outputs (one for each harmonic of
the reference) there are more output display choices in this mode than in single
reference mode, and these are listed in table 5-4. The outputs corresponding to the
two harmonics are identified by the suffices “1” and “2” respectively.

Output Description
Title
Numeric Displays Only:
R1% Resultant (Magnitude) output, harmonic1, %fs
R2% Resultant (Magnitude) output, harmonic2, %fs
θ1° Phase output, harmonic1, in degrees
θ2° Phase output, harmonic2, in degrees
X1 X1 channel output in volts or amps
X2 X2 channel output in volts or amps
Y1 Y1 channel output in volts or amps
Y2 Y2 channel output in volts or amps
R1 Resultant (Magnitude) output, harmonic1, in volts or amps
R2 Resultant (Magnitude) output, harmonic2, in volts or amps
N Noise output, harmonic1, in volts or amps per root hertz
xxxx Hz Reference frequency (fundamental) in hertz

Numeric & Bar-Graph Displays:

X1% X1 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
X2% X2 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
Y1% Y1 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
Y2% Y2 channel output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
N% Noise, harmonic1 output as a percentage of full-scale sensitivity
ADC1 ADC1 input, ±10.000 V full-scale
ADC2 ADC2 input, ±10.000 V full-scale

Bar-Graph Displays Only:

MAG1% Resultant (Magnitude) output, harmonic1, %fs
MAG2% Resultant (Magnitude) output, harmonic2, %fs
PHA1 Phase output, harmonic1, full-scale = ±200°
PHA2 Phase output, harmonic2, full-scale = ±200°

Table 5-4, Output Display Choices - Dual Harmonic Mode

NOTE: It is not possible to measure or display the noise at the harmonic2

frequency.

The additional outputs may be stored to the curve buffer, but only when the curve
selection is made via the computer interface. The Curve Select menu only allows
selection of the same sixteen data types as in single reference mode.

When in dual harmonic mode, the user-defined equations, specified on the Equation
#1 Setup and Equation #2 Setup menus, allow the selection of the additional outputs
as variables. For example, it is possible to calculate a value proportional to the ratio
of the X1 channel output to that of the X2 channel output. With suitable scaling, this
can be output to the CH1 or CH2 connectors on the rear panel as an analog voltage.

5-62
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Naturally, the two harmonics of the signal being measured share a common signal
path and hence controls affecting the signal channel, such as AC Gain and the line
filter controls, apply to both harmonics. Although the full-scale sensitivity setting can
be independently set for both harmonics, the maximum AC Gain that is possible
depends on the greater of these two values.

In dual harmonic mode the maximum detection frequency for either harmonic1 or
harmonic2 is 20 kHz.

5.6.03 Reference Channel Menu

In dual harmonic mode, the reference channel is controlled by the Reference Channel
menu, which differs from the Reference Channel menu used in the other three modes.
Additional controls are needed for the corresponding output channels, and so there are
now two Output Channel menus. The relationship of these menus to the Main Menu
is shown in figure 5-49. Note that as with the main menu structure, shown in
figure 5-1, it is possible to return to the Main Display from any menu by pressing the
MENU key on the front panel, but this has been omitted from figure 5-49 for the sake
of clarity.

Figure 5-49, Dual Harmonic Mode Menu Structure

In dual harmonic mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Reference Channel item on the
Main Menu accesses the Reference Channel menu, shown in figure 5-50.

5-63
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Figure 5-50, Reference Channel Menu - Dual Harmonic Mode

The Reference Channel menu has six controls affecting the instrument’s reference
channel. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the adjacent
keys.

REF PHASE1 (Harmonic1 Phase)

This control, which duplicates the Main Display PHA control, allows the reference
phase of harmonic1 to be adjusted over the range -180° to +180° in 10 m° steps.
Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

The Auto-Phase1 function (see section 5.6.06) also affects the setting of this control.

HARMONIC1 (Reference Harmonic)

This control allows selection of harmonic1 of the reference frequency at which the
lock-in amplifier will detect. It can be set to any value between 1st and 65535.
Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

REFERENCE (Reference Source)

This control allows selection of the source of the reference signal used to drive the
reference circuitry, and has two settings:

INT
The lock-in amplifier’s reference is taken from the instrument’s internal oscillator.
Note that this setting gives the best phase and gain measurement accuracy under
all operating conditions, and it is always to be preferred, if possible, to design the
experiment so that the lock-in amplifier acts as the source of the reference signal.

EXT
In this setting the reference channel is configured to accept a suitable external
reference source. The actual connector which should be used for this reference is
set by the Ext Source control.

EXT SOURCE
This control has two settings and is used to specify the connector to which the
external reference source is connected.

FP (Front Panel)
In this setting, which is suitable for use with reference frequencies above
300 mHz, the lock-in amplifier’s reference should be applied to the REF IN
connector on the front panel. A wide variety of signal waveforms may be

5-64
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

employed but at frequencies lower than 1 Hz, square waveforms should be used.

RP (Rear Panel)
In this setting, the lock-in amplifier’s reference should be applied to the TTL-
compatible REF TTL connector on the rear panel. The use of this input is
preferable to the front panel input when a TTL logic reference signal is available.
This setting should always be used when operating with external reference
frequencies less than 300 mHz.

REF PHASE2 (Harmonic2 Phase)

This control allows the reference phase of harmonic2 to be adjusted over the range -
180° to +180° in 10 m° steps.

The Auto-Phase2 function (see section 5.6.06) also affects the setting of this control.

HARMONIC2 (Reference Harmonic)

This control allows selection of harmonic2 of the reference frequency at which the
lock-in amplifier will detect. It can be set to any value between 1st and 65535.
Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

Sig Rec Mode/Vector VM Mode

This control should always be left set to Sig Rec Mode (signal recovery mode).

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5.6.04 Output Channel (1) Menu

When in dual harmonic mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Output Channels item on
the Main Menu accesses the Output Channel (1) menu, shown in figure 5-51.

Figure 5-51, Output Channel (1) Menu

The Output Channel (1) menu has six controls affecting the instrument’s outputs
generated by harmonic1 of the reference frequency and a key to access the Output
Channel (2) menu. Changes to the setting of these controls can be made by using the
adjacent keys.

The controls operate as follows:-

X1 OFFSET and Y1 OFFSET

These controls, which duplicate the Main Display XOF and YOF controls, allow

5-65
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

manual adjustment of the X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets. The offset level
set by the controls, which can be any value between -300 % and +300 % in 0.01 %
steps, is added to the X1 channel or Y1 channel output when the X1 channel or Y1
channel offset is switched on. Adjustment is faster if use is made of the Active Cursor
control - see section 4.1.04.

The values are set automatically by the Auto-Offset1 function. Note that the Auto-
Offset1 function automatically switches both X1 channel and Y1 channel output
offsets on.

OFFSET
This control allows the X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets, set by the above
level controls, to be switched on to either or both outputs, or to be switched off. It
therefore has four settings, as follows:-

X1 OFF, Y1 OFF
Both X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets are switched off.

X1 ON, Y1 OFF
The X1 channel output offset is switched on.

X1 OFF, Y1 ON
The Y1 channel output offset is switched on.

X1 ON, Y1 ON
Both X1 channel and Y1 channel output offsets are switched on.

TC1 (Time Constant)

This control, which duplicates the Main Display TC control, is used to set the time
constant of the channel 1 output filters. The range of possible settings is 10 ms to
100 ks in a 1-2-5 sequence and applies to all instrument outputs other than those at
the FAST X and FAST Y connectors on the rear panel. In dual harmonic mode the
signals at these connectors are complex and generally unsuitable for further use.

SLOPE1
The roll-off of the output filters for the output channels corresponding to harmonic1
of the reference is set using this control to any value from 6 dB to 24 dB/octave, in
6 dB steps.

TCs (Time Constant Mode)

This control has two settings, as follows:-

TCs SYNC (Synchronous Time Constants)

In this setting, the actual time constant used is chosen to be some multiple of the
reference frequency period. In this mode the output will be much more stable at
low frequencies than it would otherwise be. Note that, depending on the reference
frequency, output time constants shorter than 100 ms cannot be used.

5-66
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

TCs ASYNC (Asynchronous Time Constants)

In this setting, the normal mode, time constants are not related to the reference
frequency period.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Main Menu.

5.6.05 Output Channel (2) Menu

In dual harmonic mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Output Channel (2) item on the
Output Channel (1) menu accesses the Output Channel (2) menu, shown in
figure 5-52.

Figure 5-52, Output Channel (2) Menu

The Output Channel (2) menu has six controls affecting the instrument’s outputs
generated by harmonic2 of the reference frequency and one display function. Changes
to the setting of these controls can be made by using the adjacent keys.

The controls operate as follows:-

X2 OFFSET and Y2 OFFSET

These controls allow manual adjustment of the X2 channel and Y2 channel output
offsets. The offset level set by the controls, which can be any value between -300 %
and +300 % in 0.01 % steps, is added to the X2 channel or Y2 channel output when
the X2 channel or Y2 channel offset is switched on. Adjustment is faster if use is made
of the Active Cursor control - see section 4.1.04.

The values are set automatically by the Auto-Offset2 function. Note that the Auto-
Offset2 function automatically switches both X2 channel and Y2 channel output
offsets on.

OFFSET
This control allows the X2 channel and Y2 channel output offsets, set by the above
level controls, to be switched on to either or both outputs, or to be switched off. It
therefore has four settings, as follows:-

X2 OFF, Y2 OFF
Both X2 channel and Y2 channel output offsets are switched off.

X2 ON, Y2 OFF
The X2 channel output offset is switched on.

5-67
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

X2 OFF, Y2 ON
The Y2 channel output offset is switched on.

X2 ON Y2 ON
Both X2 channel and Y2 channel output offsets are switched on.

SEN2 (Full-scale Sensitivity - reference2 channel)

When set to voltage input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s
full-scale voltage sensitivity for the harmonic2 channel may be set by this control to
any value between 2 nV and 1 V in a 1-2-5 sequence.

When set to current input mode, using the Signal Channel menu, the instrument’s full-
scale current sensitivity for the harmonic2 channel may be set by this control to any
value between 2 fA and 1 µA (wide bandwidth mode) or 2 fA and 10 nA (low noise
mode), in a 1-2-5 sequence.

The number reported after the letters DR is the instrument’s Dynamic Reserve,
expressed in decibels and is calculated by the equation given in section 5.3.02.

The setting may be changed by the Auto-Sen2 function.

TC2 (Time Constant)

This control is used to set the time constant of the channel 2 output filters. The range
of possible settings is 10 ms to 100 ks in a 1-2-5 sequence and applies to all
instrument outputs other than those at the FAST X and FAST Y connectors on the
rear panel. In dual harmonic mode the signals at these connectors are complex and
generally unsuitable for further use.

SLOPE2
The roll-off of the output filters for the output channel corresponding to harmonic2 of
the reference frequency is set using this control to any value from 6 dB to 24 dB/
octave, in 6 dB steps.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Previous Menu item returns control to the Output
Channel (1) menu.

5.6.06 Auto Functions Menu

In dual harmonic mode, pressing a key adjacent to the Auto Functions item on the
Main Menu accesses the Auto Functions menu, shown in figure 5-53.

5-68
 Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Figure 5-53, Auto Functions Menu - Dual Harmonic Mode

This menu has seven controls for activating the auto functions built into the
instrument. Note that once these functions complete, the Auto Functions menu is
replaced by the Main Display. There are three auto functions for each of the two
reference channels, which operate exactly as described for single reference mode in
section 5.3.20. Although there is no Auto-Measure function, the same result may be
achieved by executing Auto-Sensitivity followed by Auto-Phase operations.

Pressing a key adjacent to the Auto-Default item carries out an Auto-Default

operation and resets the instrument to single reference mode.

5.6.07 User Options 2 Menu - Dual Harmonic Mode

Figure 5-54, User Options 2 Menu - Dual Harmonic Mode

In dual harmonic mode, the choices available on the User Options 2 menu, shown in
figure 5-54, are different to those available when in the other three modes. To leave
dual harmonic mode and return to single reference mode press a key adjacent to the
Single Reference item and to switch to dual reference mode, press a key adjacent to
the Dual Reference item. The remaining controls operate as already described in
section 5.3.17.

This completes the description of the dual harmonic mode menus.

5-69
Chapter 5, FRONT PANEL OPERATION

5.7 Typical Lock-in Amplifier Experiment

The model 7260 is a complex instrument which has many controls and the following
basic checklist may be helpful in setting up the instrument for manual operation in
single reference mode.

Auto-Default
Use the Auto-Default function on the Auto Functions menu to set the instrument to a
defined state.

Selection of Signal Input

Use the Signal Channel menu to select voltage (single-ended or differential) or current
input mode, and connect the signal source to the relevant A and/or B/I input
connector(s) on the front panel.

Selection of Reference Mode

The default setting function will have set the reference mode to internal, which
assumes that the internal oscillator will be used as a source of excitation to your
experiment. Use the Internal Oscillator amplitude and frequency controls to set the
required oscillator output, and connect the output signal from the OSC OUT
connector on the front panel to the experiment.

If using external reference mode, use the Reference Channel menu to select one of the
two External modes, and connect the reference signal to the specified connector.

Auto-Measure
Use the Auto-Measure function on the Auto Functions menu to set the instrument so
that it is correctly displaying the signal.

Other Adjustments
Use the Display Options menu to select the display format required, and the right-
hand keys on the Main Display to select the outputs allocated to the four
display positions. The three user-selected Main Display controls can be chosen using
the Display Setup menu. If the analog outputs of the instrument are to be used, use
the User Options 1 menu to specify what the output signals at the CH1 and CH2
connectors on the rear panel should represent.

5-70
Computer Operation

Chapter 6

6.1 Introduction
The model 7260 includes both RS232 and GPIB (IEEE-488) interface ports, designed
to allow the lock-in amplifier to be completely controlled from a remote computer. All
the instrument’s controls may be operated, and all the outputs read, via these
interfaces. In addition, there are a few functions, such as curve storage of the second
reference channel outputs in dual reference and dual harmonic modes, which may
only be accessed remotely.

This chapter describes the capabilities of the instrument when operated remotely and
discusses how this is done.

6.2 Capabilities
6.2.01 General
All instrument controls, which can be set using the front panel display menus, may
also be set remotely, with the exception of the two user-defined equations that must be
set up using the front panel menus. In addition, the present setting of each control can
be determined by the computer. All instrument outputs, which can be displayed on the
front panel, may also be read remotely.

There is no command to select which menu is displayed on the instrument, although if

the Main Display menu is shown then the outputs allocated to the four right-hand
positions and the three user-specified controls can be selected.

When operated via the interfaces, the following features are also available:-

6.2.02 Curve Storage

The front panel Curve Select menu allows only the basic sixteen data types associated
with single reference and virtual reference modes of operation to be selected although,
as discussed in sections 5.5 and 5.6, in both of the dual modes a second set of outputs
is generated by the instrument. If it is required to store these additional outputs in the
instrument’s internal 32768 point memory then this can only be done using computer
commands.

6.2.03 Curve Display

The Single and Double Graph menus allow only the display of stored curves of the
sixteen data types associated with single reference mode. If the additional curves
generated by the two dual modes are stored then these must be transferred to the
computer for display or processing.

6-1
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

6.3 RS232 and GPIB Operation

6.3.01 Introduction
Control of the lock-in amplifier from a computer is accomplished by means of
communications over the RS232 or GPIB interfaces. The communication activity
consists of the computer sending commands to the lock-in amplifier, and the lock-in
amplifier responding, either by sending back some data or by changing the setting of
one of its controls. The commands and responses are encoded in standard 7-bit ASCII
format, with one or more additional bits as required by the interface (see below).

The two ports cannot be used simultaneously, but when a command has been
completed, the lock-in amplifier will accept a command at either port. Also when the
test echo facility has been activated all output from the computer to the GPIB can be
monitored by a terminal attached to the RS232 connector.

Although the interface is primarily intended to enable the lock-in amplifier to be

operated by a computer program specially written for an application, it can also be
used in the direct, or terminal, mode. In this mode the user enters commands on a
keyboard and reads the results on a video screen.

The simplest way to establish the terminal mode is to connect a standard terminal, or
a terminal emulator, to the RS232 port. A terminal emulator is a computer which runs
special-purpose software that makes it act as a terminal. In the default (power-up)
state of the port, the lock-in amplifier sends a convenient prompt character when it is
ready to receive a command, and echoes each character that is received.

Microsoft Windows versions 3.1 and 3.11 include a program called Terminal, and
Windows 95 a program called Hyperterminal, usually to be found in the Accessories
group, which may be used as a terminal emulator. Alternatively a simple terminal
program with minimal facilities can be written in a few lines of BASIC code (see
appendix C.1).

6.3.02 RS232 Interface - General Features

The RS232 interface in the model 7260 is implemented with three wires; one carries
digital transmissions from the computer to the lock-in amplifier, the second carries
digital transmissions from the lock-in amplifier to the computer and the third is the
Logic Ground to which both signals are referred. The logic levels are ±12 V referred
to Logic Ground, and the connection may be a standard RS232 cable in conjunction
with a null modem or, alternatively, may be made up from low-cost general purpose
cable. The pinout of the RS232 connectors are shown in appendix B and cable
diagrams suitable for coupling the instrument to a computer are shown in
appendix D.

The main advantages of the RS232 interface are:

1. It communicates via a serial port which is present as standard equipment on

nearly all computers, using leads and connectors which are available from

6-2
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

suppliers of computer accessories or can be constructed at minimal cost in the

user’s workshop.

2. It requires no more software support than is normally supplied with the computer,
for example Microsoft’s GWBASIC, QBASIC or Windows Terminal mode.

A single RS232 transmission consists of a start bit followed by 7 or 8 data bits, an

optional parity bit, and 1 stop bit. The rate of data transfer depends on the number of
bits per second sent over the interface, usually called the baud rate. In the model 7260
the baud rate can be set to a range of different values up to 19,200, corresponding to
a minimum time of less than 0.5 ms for a single character.

Mostly for historical reasons, there are a very large number of different ways in
which RS232 communications can be implemented. Apart from the baud rate options,
there are choices of data word length (7 or 8 bits), parity check operation (even, odd
or none), and number of stop bits (1 or 2). With the exception of the number of stop
bits, which is fixed at 1, these settings may be adjusted using the RS232 Comms
menu, discussed in chapter 5. They may also be adjusted by means of the RS
command.

NOTE: In order to achieve satisfactory operation, the RS232 settings must be set
to exactly the same values in the terminal or computer as in the lock-in amplifier.

6.3.03 Choice of Baud Rate

Where the lock-in amplifier is connected to a terminal or to a computer implementing
an echo handshake, the highest available baud rate of 19,200 is normally used if, as is
usually the case, this rate is supported by the terminal or computer. Lower baud rates
may be used in order to achieve compatibility with older equipment or where there is
some special reason for reducing the communication rate.

6.3.04 Choice of Number of Data Bits

The model 7260 lock-in amplifier uses the standard ASCII character set, containing
127 characters represented by 7-bit binary words. If an 8-bit data word is selected,
the most significant bit is set to zero on output from the lock-in amplifier and ignored
on input. The result is that either the 8-bit or the 7-bit option may be used, but the 7-
bit option can result in slightly faster communication.

6.3.05 Choice of Parity Check Option

Parity checks are not required at the baud rates available in the model 7260, that is up
to 19,200 baud, with typical cable lengths of up to a few meters. Therefore no
software is provided in the model 7260 for dealing with parity errors. Where long
cables are in use, it may be advisable to make use of a lower baud rate. The result is
that any of the parity check options may be used, but the no-parity option will result
in slightly faster communication.

Where the RS232 parameters of the terminal or computer are capable of being set to
any desired value, an arbitrary choice must be made. In the model 7260 the

6-3
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

combination set at the factory is even parity check, 7 data bits, and one stop bit
(fixed) because these are the MS-DOS default.

6.3.06 Auxiliary RS232 Interface

The auxiliary RS232 interface allows up to sixteen model 7260s or a mixture of
compatible instruments to be connected to one serial port on the computer. The first
lock-in amplifier is connected to the computer in the usual way. Additional lock-in
amplifiers are connected in a daisy-chain fashion using null-modem cables, the AUX
RS232 port of the first to the RS232 port of the second, the AUX RS232 port of the
second to the RS232 port of the third, etc. The address of the lock-in amplifiers must
be set up from the front panel before any communication takes place. At power-up
the RS232 port of each lock-in amplifier is fully active irrespective of its address.
Since this means that all lock-in amplifiers in the daisy-chain are active on power-up,
the first command must be \N n where n is the address of one of the lock-in
amplifiers. This will deselect all but the addressed lock-in amplifier. When it is
required to communicate with another lock-in amplifier, send a new \N n command
using the relevant address.

NOTE: When programming in C remember that in order to send the character \ in

a string it is necessary to type in \\ .

6.3.07 GPIB Interface - General Features

The GPIB is a parallel digital interface with 8 bi-directional data lines, and 8 further
lines which implement additional control and communication functions.
Communication is through 24-wire cables (including 8 ground connections) with
special-purpose connectors which are constructed in such a way that they can be
stacked on top of one another to enable numerous instruments to be connected in
parallel. By means of internal hardware or software switches, each instrument is set
to a different address on the bus, usually a number in the range 0 to 31. In the model
7260 the address is set using the GPIB Comms menu or by means of the GP
command.

A most important aspect of the GPIB is that its operation is defined in minute detail
by the IEEE-488 standard, usually implemented by special-purpose semiconductor
devices that are present in each instrument and communicate with the instrument’s
microprocessor. The existence of this standard greatly simplifies the problem of
programming the bus controller, i.e. the computer, to implement complex
measurement and test systems involving the interaction of numerous instruments.
There are fewer interface parameters to be set than with RS232 communications.

The operation of the GPIB requires the computer to be equipped with special-purpose
hardware, usually in the form of a plug-in card, and associated software which enable
it to act as a bus controller. The control program is written in a high-level language,
usually BASIC or C, containing additional subroutines implemented by software
supplied by the manufacturer of the interface card.

Because of the parallel nature of the GPIB and its very effective use of the control
lines, including the implementation of a three-wire handshake (see below),
comparatively high data rates, up to a few hundred thousand bytes per second, are

6-4
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

possible. In typical setups the data rate of the GPIB itself is not the factor that limits
the rate of operation of the control program.

6.3.08 Handshaking and Echoes

A handshake is a method of ensuring that the transmitter does not send a byte until
the receiver is ready to receive it, and, in the case of a parallel interface, that the
receiver reads the data lines only when they contain a valid byte.

GPIB Handshaking
The GPIB interface includes three lines (*DAV, *NRFD, *NDAC) which are used to
implement a three-wire handshake. The operation of this is completely defined by the
IEEE-488 standard and is fully automatic, so that the user does not need to know
anything about the handshake when writing programs for the GPIB. Note that each
command must be correctly terminated.

RS232 Handshaking
In the RS232 standard there are several control lines called handshake lines (RTS,
DTR outputs and CTS, DSR, DCD inputs) in addition to the data lines (TD output
and RD input). However, these lines are not capable of implementing the handshaking
function required by the model 7260 on a byte-by-byte basis and are not connected in
the model 7260 apart from the RTS and DTR outputs which are constantly asserted.

Note that some computer applications require one or more of the computer’s RS232
handshake lines to be asserted. If this is the case, and if the requirement cannot be
changed by the use of a software switch, the cable may be used in conjunction with a
null modem. A null modem is an adapter which connects TD on each side through to
RD on the other side, and asserts CTS, DSR, and DCD on each side when RTS and
DTR are asserted on the opposite sides.

With most modern software there is no need to assert any RS232 handshake lines and
a simple three-wire connection can be used. The actual handshake function is
performed by means of bytes transmitted over the interface.

The more critical handshake is the one controlling the transfer of a command from the
computer to the lock-in amplifier, because the computer typically operates much
faster than the lock-in amplifier and bytes can easily be lost if the command is sent
from a program. (Note that because of the limited speed of human typing, there is no
problem in the terminal mode.) To overcome the problem an echo handshake is used.
This works in the following way: after receiving each byte, the lock-in amplifier sends
back an echo, that is a byte which is a copy of the one that it has just received, to
indicate that it is ready to receive the next byte. Correspondingly, the computer does
not send the next byte until it has read the echo of the previous one. Usually the
computer makes a comparison of each byte with its echo, and this constitutes a useful
check on the validity of the communications.

Where the echo is not required, it can be suppressed by negating bit 3 in the RS232
parameter byte. The default (power-up) state of this bit is for it to be asserted.

The program [Link] in section C.2 illustrates the use of the echo handshake.

6-5
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

6.3.09 Terminators
In order for communications to be successfully established between the lock-in
amplifier and the computer, it is essential that each transmission, i.e. command or
command response, is terminated in a way which is recognizable by the computer and
the lock-in amplifier as signifying the end of that transmission.

In the model 7260 there are three input termination options for GPIB
communications, selected from the front panel under the GPIB Comms menu or by
means of the GP command. The lock-in amplifier may be set to expect the <CR> byte
(ASCII 13) or the <CR,LF> sequence (ASCII 13 followed by ASCII 10) to be
appended by the controller as a terminator to the end of each command. Alternatively
instead of a terminator it may expect the EOI signal line (pin 5 on the GPIB
connector) to be asserted during the transmission of the last character of the
command. The third option is normally to be preferred with modern interface cards
which can easily be set to a wide variety of configurations.

The selected GPIB termination option applies also to the output termination of any
responses sent back by the lock-in amplifier to the controller, i.e. the lock-in amplifier
will send <CR> or <CR,LF> or no byte as appropriate. In all cases the lock-in
amplifier asserts the EOI signal line during the transmission of the last byte of a
response.

In RS232 communications, the lock-in amplifier automatically accepts either <CR>

or <CR,LF> as an input command terminator, and sends out <CR,LF> as an output
response terminator except when the noprompt bit (bit 4 in the RS232 parameter
byte) is set, in which case the terminator is <CR>. The default (power-up) state of
this bit is zero.

6.3.10 Command Format

The simple commands listed in section 6.4 have one of five forms:

CMDNAME terminator
CMDNAME n terminator
CMDNAME [n] terminator
CMDNAME [n1 [n2]] terminator
CMDNAME n1 [n2] terminator

where CMDNAME is an alphanumeric string that defines the command, and n, n1, n2
are parameters separated by spaces. When n is not enclosed in square brackets it must
be supplied. [n] means that n is optional. [n 1 [n2]] means that n1 is optional and if
present may optionally be followed by n2. Upper-case and lower-case characters are
equivalent. Terminator bytes are defined in section 6.3.09.

Where the command syntax includes optional parameters and the command is
sent without the optional parameters, the response consists of a transmission of
the present values of the parameter(s).

Any response transmission consists of one or more numbers followed by a response

6-6
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

terminator. Where the response consists of two or more numbers in succession, they
are separated by a delimiter (section 6.3.11).

Some commands have an optional floating point mode which is invoked by appending
a . (full stop) character to the end of the command and before the parameters. This
allows some parameters to be entered or read in floating point format. The floating
point output format is given below.

±1.234E±01

The number of digits between the decimal point and the exponent varies depending on
the number but is a minimum of one and a maximum of eight. The input format is not
as strict but if a decimal point is used there must be a digit before it. An exponent is
optional. The following are all legal commands for setting the oscillator frequency to
100.1 Hz:-

OF. 100.1
OF. 1.001E2
OF. +1.001E+02
OF. 1001E-1

6.3.11 Delimiters
Any response transmissions consist of one or two numbers followed by a response
terminator. Where the response of the lock-in amplifier consists of two numbers in
succession, they are separated by a byte called a delimiter. This delimiter can be any
printing ASCII character and is selected via the RS232 Comms menu or by the use of
the DD command.

6.3.12 Compound Commands

A compound command consists of two or more simple commands separated by
semicolons (ASCII 59) and terminated by a single command terminator. If any of the
responses involve data transmissions, each one is followed by an output terminator.

6.3.13 Status Byte, Prompts and Overload Byte

An important feature of the IEEE-488 standard is the serial poll operation by which a
special byte, the status byte, may be read at any time from any instrument on the bus.
This contains information which must be urgently conveyed from the instrument to
the controller.

The function of the individual bits in the status byte is instrument dependent, apart
from bit 6 (the request service bit) whose functions are defined by the standard.

In the model 7260, bits 0 and 7 signify “command complete” and “data available”
respectively. In GPIB communications, the use of these bits can lead to a useful
simplification of the control program by providing a response subroutine which is the
same for all commands, whether or not they send a response over the bus. The
principle is that after any command is sent, serial poll operations are repeatedly

6-7
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

executed. After each operation bit 0 is tested; if this is found to be negated then bit 7
is repeatedly tested, and if this is asserted then a read operation is performed. Serial
poll operations continue until the lock-in amplifier asserts bit 0 to indicate that the
command-response sequence is complete. This method deals successfully with
compound commands.

In RS232 communications, comparatively rapid access to the status byte is provided

by the prompt character which is sent by the lock-in amplifier at the same time as
bit 0 becomes asserted in the status byte. This character is sent out by the lock-in
amplifier after each command response (whether or not the response includes a
transmission over the interface) to indicate that the response is finished and the
instrument is ready for a new command. The prompt takes one of two forms. If the
command contained an error, either in syntax or by a command parameter being out
of range, or alternatively if an overload or reference unlock is currently being
reported by the front panel indicators, the prompt is ? (ASCII 63). Otherwise the
prompt is * (ASCII 42).

These error conditions correspond to the assertion of bits 1, 2, 3 or 4 in the status

byte. When the ? prompt is received by the computer, the ST command may be issued
in order to discover which type of fault exists and to take appropriate action.

The prompts are a rapid way of checking on the instrument status and enable a
convenient keyboard control system to be set up simply by attaching a standard
terminal, or a simple computer-based terminal emulator, to the RS232 port. Where
the prompt is not required it can be suppressed by setting the noprompt bit, bit 4 in
the RS232 parameter byte. The default (power-up) state of this bit is zero.

Because of the limited number of bits in the status byte, it can indicate that an
overload exists but cannot give more detail. An auxiliary byte, the overload byte
returned by the N command, gives details of the location of the overload.

A summary of the bit assignments in the status byte and the overload byte is given
below.

Bit Status Byte Overload Byte

bit 0 command complete not used
bit 1 invalid command CH1 output overload
bit 2 command parameter error CH2 output overload
bit 3 reference unlock Y channel output overload
bit 4 overload X channel output overload
bit 5 new ADC values available not used
after external trigger
bit 6 asserted SRQ input overload
bit 7 data available reference unlock

6.3.14 Service Requests

The interface defined by the IEEE-488 standard includes a line (pin 10 on the
connector) called the SRQ (service request) line which is used by the instrument to
signal to the controller that urgent attention is required. At the same time that the

6-8
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

instrument asserts the SRQ line, it also asserts bit 6 in the status byte. The controller
responds by executing a serial poll of all the instruments on the bus in turn and testing
bit 6 of the status byte in order to discover which instrument was responsible for
asserting the SRQ line. The status byte of that instrument is then further tested in
order to discover the reason for the service request and to take appropriate action.

In the model 7260 the assertion of the SRQ line is under the control of a byte called
the SRQ mask byte which can be set by the user with the MSK command or via the
GPIB Comms menu. If any bit in the status byte becomes asserted, and the
corresponding bit in the mask byte has a non-zero value, the SRQ line is
automatically asserted. If the value of the mask byte is zero, the SRQ line is never
asserted.

Hence, for example, if the SRQ mask byte is set to 16, a service request would be
generated as soon as an overload occurred; if the SRQ mask byte were set to 0, then
service requests would never be generated.

6.3.15 Comms Test Menu

A most useful feature of the model 7260 when troubleshooting communications
problems is the Comms Test menu, which is described in detail in section 5.3.24.
However, once the problem has been resolved it is recommended that the instrument
be reset to Main Display mode to avoid slowing down communications.

6.4 Command Descriptions

This section lists the commands in logical groups, so that, for example, all commands
associated with setting controls which affect the signal channel are shown together.
Appendix E gives the same list of commands but in alphabetical order.

6.4.01 Signal Channel

IMODE [n] Current/Voltage mode input selector
The value of n sets the input mode according to the following table:

n Input mode
0 Current mode off - voltage mode input enabled
1 High bandwidth (HB) current mode enabled - connect signal to B input connector
2 Low noise (LN) current mode enabled - connect signal to B input connector

If n = 0 then the input configuration is determined by the VMODE command.

If n > 0 then current mode is enabled irrespective of the VMODE setting.

6-9
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

VMODE [n] Voltage input configuration

The value of n sets up the input configuration according to the following table:

n Input configuration
0 Both inputs grounded (test mode)
1 A input only
2 -B input only
3 A-B differential mode

Note that the IMODE command takes precedence over the VMODE command.

FET [n] Voltage mode input device control

The value of n selects the input device according to the following table:

n Selection
0 Bipolar device, 10 kΩ input impedance, 2 nV/√Hz voltage noise at 1 kHz
1 FET, 10 MΩ input impedance, 5 nV/√Hz voltage noise at 1 kHz

FLOAT [n] Input connector shield float/ground control

The value of n sets the input connector shield switch according to the following table:

n Selection
0 Ground
1 Float (connected to ground via a 1 kΩ resistor)

CP [n] Input connector shield float/ground control

The value of n sets the input coupling mode according to the following table:

n Coupling mode
0 AC
1 DC

SEN [n]
SEN. Full-scale sensitivity control
The value of n sets the full-scale sensitivity according to the following table,
depending on the setting of the IMODE control:

n full-scale sensitivity
IMODE=0 IMODE=1 IMODE=2
1 2 nV 2 fA n/a
2 5 nV 5 fA n/a
3 10 nV 10 fA n/a
4 20 nV 20 fA n/a
5 50 nV 50 fA n/a
6 100 nV 100 fA n/a
7 200 nV 200 fA 2 fA
8 500 nV 500 fA 5 fA
9 1 µV 1 pA 10 fA
10 2 µV 2 pA 20 fA
11 5 µV 5 pA 50 fA

6-10
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

n full-scale sensitivity
IMODE=0 IMODE=1 IMODE=2
12 10 µV 10 pA 100 fA
13 20 µV 20 pA 200 fA
14 50 µV 50 pA 500 fA
15 100 µV 100 pA 1 pA
16 200 µV 200 pA 2 pA
17 500 µV 500 pA 5 pA
18 1 mV 1 nA 10 pA
19 2 mV 2 nA 20 pA
20 5 mV 5 nA 50 pA
21 10 mV 10 nA 100 pA
22 20 mV 20 nA 200 pA
23 50 mV 50 nA 500 pA
24 100 mV 100 nA 1 nA
25 200 mV 200 nA 2 nA
26 500 mV 500 nA 5 nA
27 1V 1 µA 10 nA

Floating point mode can only be used for reading the sensitivity, which is reported in
volts or amps. For example, if IMODE = 0 and the sensitivity is 1 mV the command
SEN would report 18 and the command SEN. would report +1.0E-03. If IMODE was
changed to 1, SEN would still report 18 but SEN. would report +1.0E-09.

AS Perform an Auto-Sensitivity operation

The instrument adjusts its full-scale sensitivity so that the magnitude output lies
between 30 % and 90 % of full-scale.

ASM Perform an Auto-Measure operation

The instrument adjusts its full-scale sensitivity so that the magnitude output lies
between 30 % and 90 % of full-scale, and then performs an auto-phase operation to
maximize the X channel output and minimize the Y channel output.

ACGAIN [n] AC Gain control

Sets the gain of the signal channel amplifier. Values of n from 0 to 9 can be entered,
corresponding to the range 0 dB to 90 dB in 10 dB steps.

AUTOMATIC [n] AC Gain automatic control

The value of n sets the status of the AC Gain control according to the following table:

n Status
0 AC Gain is under manual control, either using the front panel or the ACGAIN
command
1 Automatic AC Gain control is activated, with the gain being adjusted according
to the full-scale sensitivity setting

6-11
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

LF [n] Signal channel line frequency rejection filter control

In instruments manufactured up to June 1996, the value of n sets the mode of the line
frequency notch filter according to the following table:

n Selection
0 Off
1 On (i.e. reject 50/60 Hz and 100/120 Hz)

In instruments manufactured after June 1996, the value of n sets the mode of the line
frequency notch filter according to the following table:

n Selection
0 Off
1 Enable 50 or 60 Hz notch filter
2 Enable 100 or 120 Hz notch filter
3 Enable both filters

Users may identify which version of the instrument they have by sending the
command LF 3; if this is accepted by the instrument, it was made after June 1996,
but if it generates a command error, it was made prior to this date.

Additionally units made after June 1996 respond to the command, LINE50, which
sets the notch filter center frequency.

LINE50 [n] Signal channel line frequency rejection filter center frequency control
The value of n sets the line frequency notch filter center frequency according to the
following table:

n Notch filter mode

0 60 Hz (and/or 120 Hz)
1 50 Hz (and/or 100 Hz)

Units made prior to July 1996 generate an Invalid Command (bit 1 of the serial poll
status byte is asserted) to the LINE50 command.

SAMPLE [n] Main analog to digital converter sample rate control

The sampling rate of the main analog to digital converter, which is nominally
166 kHz, may be adjusted from this value to avoid problems caused by the aliasing of
interfering signals into the output passband.

n may be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3, corresponding to four different sampling rates (not

specified) near 166 kHz.

RANGE [n] Signal Recovery/Vector Voltmeter mode selector

The value of n sets the operating mode of the instrument as follows:

n Mode
0 Signal Recovery
1 Vector Voltmeter

NOTE: Instrument always reverts to signal recovery mode (n=0) on power-up.

6-12
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

6.4.02 Reference Channel

REFMODE [n] Reference mode selector
The value of n sets the reference mode of the instrument according to the following
table:

n Mode
0 Single Reference / Virtual Reference mode
1 Dual Harmonic mode
2 Dual Reference mode

NOTE: When in either of the dual reference modes the command set changes to
accommodate the additional controls. These changes are detailed in section
6.4.14.

IE [n] Reference channel source control (Internal/External)

The value of n sets the reference input mode according to the following table:

n Selection
0 INT (internal)
1 EXT LOGIC (external rear panel TTL input)
2 EXT (external front panel analog input)

REFN [n] Reference harmonic mode control

The value of n sets the reference channel to one of the NF modes, or restores it to the
default 1F mode. The value of n is in the range 1 to 65535.

REFP[.] [n] Reference phase control

In fixed point mode n sets the phase in millidegrees in the range ±360000.

In floating point mode n sets the phase in degrees.

AQN Auto-Phase (auto quadrature null)

The instrument adjusts the reference phase to maximize the X channel output and
minimize the Y channel output signals.

FRQ[.] Reference frequency meter

If the lock-in amplifier is in the external reference source modes, the FRQ command
causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with 0 if the reference channel is unlocked, or
with the reference input frequency if it is locked.

If the lock-in amplifier is in the internal reference source mode, it responds with the
frequency of the internal oscillator.

In fixed point mode the frequency is in mHz.

In floating point mode the frequency is in Hz.

LOCK System lock control

Updates all frequency dependent gain and phase correction parameters.

6-13
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

VRLOCK [n] Virtual reference mode lock

The Seek option of the frequency sweep mode must be used before issuing this
command, for which the value of n has the following significance:

n Mode
0 Disables virtual reference mode
1 Enters virtual reference mode by enabling tracking of the signal frequency

6.4.03 Signal Channel Output Filters

SLOPE [n] Output low-pass filter slope (roll-off) control

The value of n sets the slope of the output filters according to the following table:

n Slope
0 6 dB/octave
1 12 dB/octave
2 18 dB/octave
3 24 dB/octave

TC [n]
TC. Filter time constant control
The value of n sets the time constant of the output according to the following table:

n time constant
0 10 µs
1 20 µs
2 40 µs
3 80 µs
4 160 µs
5 320 µs
6 640 µs
7 5 ms
8 10 ms
9 20 ms
1 50 ms
11 100 ms
12 200 ms
13 500 ms
14 1s
15 2s
16 5s
17 10 s
18 20 s
19 50 s
20 100 s
21 200 s
22 500 s
23 1 ks
24 2 ks

6-14
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

n time constant
25 5 ks
26 10 ks
27 20 ks
28 50 ks
29 100 ks

The TC. command is only used for reading the time constant, and reports the current
setting in seconds. Hence if a TC 11 command were sent, TC would report 11 and
TC. would report 1.0E-01, i.e. 0.1 s or 100 ms.

SYNC [n] Synchronous time constant control

At reference frequencies below 10 Hz, if the synchronous time constant is enabled,
then the actual time constant of the output filters is not generally the selected value T
but rather a value equal to an integer number of reference cycles. If T is greater than
1 cycle, the time constant is between T/2 and T. The parameter n has the following
significance:

n Effect
0 Synchronous time constant disabled
1 Synchronous time constant enabled

6.4.04 Signal Channel Output Amplifiers

XOF [n1 [n2]] X channel output offset control
The value of n1 sets the status of the X offset facility according to the following table:

n1 Selection
0 Disables offset
1 Enables offset facility

The range of n2 is ±30000 corresponding to ±300 % full-scale.

YOF [n1 [n2]] Y channel output offset control

The value of n1 sets the status of the Y offset facility according to the following table:

n1 Selection
0 Disables offset facility
1 Enables offset facility

The range of n2 is ±30000 corresponding to ±300 % full-scale.

AXO Auto-Offset
The X and Y channel output offsets are turned on and set to levels giving zero X and
Y channel outputs. Any changes in the input signal then appear as changes about zero
in the outputs.

6-15
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

EX [n] Output expansion control

Expands X and/or Y channel outputs by a factor of 10. Changes bar-graphs, CH1
and CH2 outputs full-scale to ±10 % if X or Y selected. The value of n has the
following significance:

n Expand mode
0 Off
1 Expand X
2 Expand Y
3 Expand X and Y

CH n1 [n2] Analog output control

Defines what outputs appear on the CH1 and CH2 connectors on the rear panel
according to the following table:

n2 Signal
0 X %FS
1 Y %FS
2 Magnitude %FS
3 Phase 1:- +9 V = +180°, -9 V = -180°
4 Phase 2:- +9 V = 360°, - 9 V = 0°
5 Noise %FS
6 Ratio:- (1000 × X)/ADC 1
7 Log Ratio:- log10 (X/ADC1)
8 Equation 1
9 Equation 2

Dual modes only:-

10 X2 %FS
11 Y2 %FS
12 Magnitude2 %FS
13 Phase2 1:- +9 V = +180°, -9 V = -180°
14 Phase2 2:- +9 V = 360°, - 9 V = 0°

n1 is compulsory and is either 1 for CH1 or 2 for CH2.

n2 may only be set to values between 10 and 14 if one of the dual modes is active. If
set to one of these values and the unit is then switched back to single reference mode
the output will change to the corresponding single reference equivalent. (e.g. n2 = 10,
X2 %FS, will change to n2 = 0, X %FS).

6.4.05 Instrument Outputs

X[.] X channel output
In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the X demodulator
output in the range ±30000, full-scale being ±10000.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the X demodulator
output in volts or amps.

6-16
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

Y[.] Y channel output

In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the Y demodulator
output in the range ±30000, full-scale being ±10000.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the Y demodulator
output in volts or amps.

XY[.] X, Y channel outputs

Equivalent to the compound command X[.];Y[.]

MAG[.] Magnitude
In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the magnitude value
in the range 0 to 30000, full-scale being 10000.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the magnitude
value in the range +3.000E0 to +0.001E-9 volts or +3.000E-6 to +0.001E-15 amps.

PHA[.] Signal phase

In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the signal phase in
centidegrees, in the range ±18000.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the signal phase in
degrees.

MP[.] Magnitude, phase

Equivalent to the compound command MAG[.];PHA[.]

RT[.] Ratio output

In integer mode the RT command reports a number equivalent to 1000×X/ADC1
where X is the value that would be returned by the X command and ADC1 is the
value that would be returned by the ADC1 command.

In floating point mode the RT. command reports a number equivalent to X/ADC1.

LR[.] Log Ratio output

In integer mode, the LR command reports a number equivalent to
1000×log(X/ADC1) where X is the value that would be returned by the X command
and ADC1 is the value that would be returned by the ADC1 command. The response
range is -3000 to +2079.

In floating point mode, the LR. command reports a number equivalent to

log(X/ADC1). The response range is -3.000 to +2.079.

NHZ.
Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the square root of the noise spectral
density measured at the Y channel output, expressed in volt/√Hz or amps/√Hz
referred to the input. This measurement assumes that the Y channel output is
Gaussian with zero mean. (See section 3.10). The command is only available in
floating point mode.

NOTE: This command is not available when the reference frequency exceeds
60 kHz.
6-17
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

ENBW[.] Equivalent noise bandwidth

In fixed point mode, reports the equivalent noise bandwidth of the output low-pass
filters at the current time constant setting in microhertz.

In floating point mode, reports the equivalent noise bandwidth of the output low-pass
filters at the current time constant setting in hertz.

NOTE: This command is not available when the reference frequency exceeds
60 kHz.

NN[.] Noise output

In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the mean absolute
value of the Y channel output in the range 0 to 12000, full-scale being 10000. If the
mean value of the Y channel output is zero, this is a measure of the output noise.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond in volts.

EQU n Output result of equation #1 or equation #2

The value returned is the output of the user equation #1 (n = 1) or equation #2
(n = 2), where the equations are defined using the Equation Setup menus (see section
5.3.11). The possible range is ±2,147,483,647 (signed 32-bit integer).

NOTE: There are no computer commands for defining the equations, so this must
be done manually using the Equation Setup menus.

STAR [n] Star mode setup command

The star mode allows faster access to instrument outputs than is possible using the
conventional commands. The mode is set up using the STAR command to specify the
output(s) required and invoked by sending an asterisk (ASCII 42) to request the data.
The data returned is specified by the value of n, as follows:

n Data returned by * command

0 X
1 Y
2 MAG
3 PHA
4 ADC1
5 XY
6 MP
7 ADC1;ADC2
8 X1;X2
9 Y1;Y2
10 MAG1;MAG2
11 PHA1;PHA2

* Transfer command
This command establishes the high-speed transfer mode. Use the STAR command to
set up the desired response to the * command, and then send an * (ASCII 42), without
terminator, to the instrument. The instrument will reply with the selected output as
quickly as possible, and then wait for another *. If the computer processes the reply

6-18
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

quickly and responds immediately with another *, then very rapid controlled data
transfer is possible.

The first transfer takes a little longer than subsequent ones because some overhead
time is required for the model 7260 to get into the high-speed transfer mode. When in
this mode, the front panel controls are inactive and the display is frozen.

The mode is terminated either by sending any command other than an *, when the
instrument will exit the mode and process the new command, or after a period of 10
seconds following the last * command.

NOTE: Check that the computer program does not automatically add a carriage
return or carriage return-line feed terminator to the * command, since these
characters will slow down communications.

6.4.06 Internal Oscillator

OA[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude control
In fixed point mode n sets the oscillator amplitude in mV. The range of n is 0 to 5000
representing 0 to 5 V r.m.s..

In floating point mode n sets the amplitude in volts.

ASTART[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude sweep start amplitude

Sets the start amplitude for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator amplitude, in
the range 0 to 5.000 V.

In fixed point mode, n is in millivolts r.m.s..

In floating point mode n is in volts r.m.s..

ASTOP[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude sweep stop amplitude

Sets the stop amplitude for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator amplitude, in
the range 0 to 5.000 V.

In fixed point mode, n is in millivolts r.m.s.

In floating point mode n is in volts r.m.s.

ASTEP[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude sweep step size

Sets the amplitude step size for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator
amplitude, in the range 0 to 5.000 V.

In fixed point mode, n is in millivolts r.m.s.

In floating point mode n is in volts r.m.s.

OF[.] [n] Oscillator frequency control

In fixed point mode n sets the oscillator frequency in mHz. The range of n is 0 to
250,000,000 representing 0 to 250 kHz.

In floating point mode n sets the oscillator frequency in Hz. The range of n is 0 to
2.5E5.

6-19
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

SYNCOSC [n] Synchronous oscillator (demodulator monitor) control

This control operates only in external reference mode. The parameter n has the
following significance:

n Effect
0 Synchronous Oscillator (Demodulator Monitor) disabled
1 Synchronous Oscillator (Demodulator Monitor) enabled

When enabled and in external reference mode, the instrument’s OSC OUT connector
functions as a demodulator monitor of the X channel demodulation function.

FSTART[.] [n] Oscillator frequency sweep start frequency

Sets the start frequency for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator frequency, in
the range 0 to 250 kHz.

In fixed point mode, n is in millihertz.

In floating point mode n is in hertz.

FSTOP[.] [n] Oscillator frequency sweep stop frequency

Sets the stop frequency for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator frequency, in
the range 0 to 250 kHz.

In fixed point mode, n is in millihertz.

In floating point mode n is in hertz.

FSTEP[.] [n1 n2] Oscillator frequency sweep step size and type
The frequency may be swept either linearly or logarithmically, as specified by
parameter n2. The step size is specified by parameter n1.

Log sweep n2 = 0
In fixed point mode, n1 is the step size in thousandths of a percent.
In floating point mode n 1 is in percent. The range of n1 is 0 to 100.00 %

Linear sweep n2 = 1
In fixed point mode, n1 is the step size in millihertz.
In floating point mode n1 is in hertz. The range of n1 is 0 to 10 kHz

SRATE[.] [n] Oscillator frequency and amplitude sweep step rate

Sets the sweep rate in time per step in the range 50 ms to 1000 s, in 5 ms increments.

SWEEP [n] Oscillator frequency and amplitude sweep start/stop

Starts/stops the internal oscillator frequency and amplitude sweeps depending on the
value of n according to the following table:

n Sweep status
0 Stop/Pause
1 Start frequency sweep
2 Start amplitude sweep
3 Start frequency sweep and amplitude sweep

6-20
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

When a frequency and/or amplitude sweep has been defined, applying SWEEP 1 will
start it. The sweep will continue until the stop frequency or amplitude is reached. If,
during the sweep, SWEEP 0 is applied, the sweep will stop at the current frequency.
If SWEEP 1 is then applied, the sweep will restart from this point. Once the sweep
reaches the stop frequency or amplitude and stops, the next SWEEP 1 command will
reset the frequency or amplitude to the start frequency or amplitude and restart the
sweep.

6.4.07 Auxiliary Outputs

DAC[.] n1 [n2] Auxiliary DAC output controls
Sets the voltage appearing at the DAC1, DAC2, DAC1 and DAC2 outputs on the
rear panel.

The first parameter n1, which specifies the DAC, is compulsory and is either 1, 2, 3
or 4.

The value of n2 specifies the voltage to be output.

In fixed point mode it is an integer in the range -12000 to +12000, corresponding to

voltages from -12.000 V to +12.000 V.

In floating point mode it is in volts.

BYTE [n] Digital output port control

The value of n, in the range 0 to 255, determines the bits to be output on the rear
panel digital output port. When n = 0, all outputs are low, and when n = 255, all are
high.

6.4.08 Auxiliary Inputs

ADC[.] n Read auxiliary analog to digital inputs
Reads the voltage appearing at the ADC1 (n = 1), ADC2 (n = 2) or ADC3 (n = 3)
inputs on the rear panel.

The response for ADC1 and ADC2 in fixed point mode is an integer in the range -
12000 to +12000, corresponding to voltages from -12.000 V to +12.000 V.

In floating point mode it is in volts.

ADC3 is an integrating converter. The response for ADC3 is fixed point only, and
depends on the sample time as set by the ADC3TIME command. The full-scale
response with a 1 s sample time is ±500000 for ±10 V input. The response is
proportional to the sample time e.g. 100 ms sample time gives a full-scale response of
±50000.

ADC3TIME [n] ADC3 Sample time

n sets the ADC3 sample time in milliseconds in the range 10 ms to 2 s in 10 ms
increments. If a number is entered which is within the legal range but not a multiple
of 10 ms then it will be rounded down to the nearest multiple of 10 ms.

6-21
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

TADC [n] Auxiliary ADC trigger mode control

The value of n sets the trigger mode of the auxiliary ADC inputs according to the
following table:

n Trigger mode
0 Asynchronous (5 ms intervals)
1 External (rear panel TRIG input)
2 Burst mode, fixed rate, triggered by command (ADC1 only)
3 Burst mode, fixed rate, triggered by command (ADC1 and ADC2)
4 Burst mode, variable rate, triggered by command (ADC1 only)
5 Burst mode, variable rate, triggered by command (ADC1 and ADC2)
6 Burst mode, fixed rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 only)
7 Burst mode, fixed rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 and
ADC2)
8 Burst mode, variable rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 only)
9 Burst mode, variable rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 and
ADC2)

In the burst modes, data is stored in the curve buffer. Use the LEN command to set
the number of points required. Note that it may be necessary to enter CBD 32 before
setting the length, if the curve buffer has previously been used for more than one data
type. The data is read out from the buffer using DC[.] 5 for ADC1 and DC[.] 6 for
ADC2. If the length is set to more than 16384 and a burst mode which stores both
ADC1 and ADC2 is specified then the curve length will automatically be reduced to
16384 points. Note also that setting the TADC parameter to any value other than 0 or
1 may affect the CBD parameter, as follows:

TADC parameter Effect on CBD parameter

0 none
1 none
2 automatically set to 32
3 automatically set to 96
4 automatically set to 32
5 automatically set to 96
6 automatically set to 32
7 automatically set to 96
8 automatically set to 32
9 automatically set to 96

The maximum sampling rate depends on the number of ADC inputs used and whether
the sampling is timed or simply runs as fast as possible. In the modes described above
as Fixed Rate, sampling runs at the maximum possible rate, nominally 20 kHz, when
sampling both ADC1 and ADC2, or 40 kHz when sampling ADC1 only. In the
Variable Rate modes, the sampling speed is set by the BURSTRATE command.

BURSTRATE [n] Sets the burst mode sampling rate for ADC1 and ADC2
n sets the sample rate for the Variable Rate burst modes according to the following
equations:

6-22
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

When storing only to ADC1:

(i.e. TADC 2, TADC 4, TADC 6 and TADC 8)

 16,000,000 
Sample Rate =   Hz
 (( 25 × n) + 157 

When storing to ADC1 and ADC 2:

(i.e. TADC 3, TADC 5, TADC 7 and TADC 9)

 16,000,000 
Sample Rate =   Hz
((25 × n) +1031 

Note that these equations apply only to units manufactured after December 1995.
Earlier instruments used a 16.384 MHz instead of a 16.0 MHz crystal, so the above
equations should be modified accordingly by replacing the 16,000,000 figure with
16,384,000.

For example when n = 20, the sample rate will be 24,353 Hz for ADC1 for an
instrument with a 16.0 MHz crystal, and 24,937 Hz for a unit with a 16.384 MHz
crystal.

6.4.09 Output Data Curve Buffer

CBD [n] Curve buffer define
Defines which data outputs are stored in the curve buffer when subsequent TD (take
data), TDT (take data triggered) or TDC (take data continuously) commands are
issued. Up to 16 (or 21 in dual reference and dual harmonic modes) curves, or
outputs, may be acquired, as specified by the CBD parameter.

The CBD parameter is an integer between 0 and 65,535, being the decimal equivalent
of a 16-bit binary word. In either of the dual reference modes, it is an integer between
1 and 2,097,151, being the decimal equivalent of a 21-bit binary number. When a
given bit is asserted, the corresponding output is selected for storage. When a bit is
negated, the output is not stored. The bit function and range for each output are
shown in the table below:

Bit Decimal value Output and range

0 1 X Output (±10000 FS)
1 2 Y Output (±10000 FS)
2 4 Magnitude Output (+10000 FS)
3 8 Phase (±18000 = ±180°)
4 16 Sensitivity setting (1 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)
5 32 ADC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
6 64 ADC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
7 128 ADC3 (-32768 to + 32767)
8 256 DAC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
9 512 DAC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)

6-23
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

Bit Decimal value Output and range

10 1024 Noise (±10000 FS)
11 2048 Ratio (±10000 FS)
12 4096 Log ratio (-3000 to +2000)
13 8192 EVENT variable (0 to 32767)
14 16384 Reference frequency bits 0 to 15 (mHz)
15 32768 Reference frequency bits 16 to 32 (mHz)

Dual modes only:-

16 65536 X2 Output (±10000 FS)
17 131072 Y2 Output (±10000 FS)
18 262144 Magnitude2 Output (+10000 FS)
19 524288 Phase2 Output (±18000 = ±180°)
20 1048576 Sensitivity2 setting (4 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)

32768 points are available for data storage, shared equally between the specified
curves. For example, if 16 outputs are stored then the maximum number of storage
points would be 2048 (i.e. 32768/16). The LEN command sets the actual curve
length, which cannot therefore be longer than 32768 divided by the number of curves
selected. If more curves are requested than can be stored with the current buffer
length, then the buffer length will be automatically reduced. Its actual length can of
course be determined by sending the LEN command without a parameter.

The reason why bit 4 and, for dual reference modes, bit 20, which store both the
sensitivity and the IMODE setting, are needed, is to allow the instrument to transfer
the acquired curves to the computer in floating point mode. Without this information,
the unit would not be able to determine the correct calibration to apply.

Curves 14 and 15 store the reference frequency in millihertz. The calculation needed
to translate these two 16-bit values to one 32-bit value is:

Reference Frequency = (65536 × value in Curve 15) + (value in Curve 14)

Note that the CBD command directly determines the allowable parameters for the DC
and HC commands. It also interacts with the LEN command and affects the values
reported by the M command.

LEN [n] Curve length control

The value of n sets the curve buffer length in effect for data acquisition. The
maximum allowed value depends on the number of curves requested using the CBD
command, and a parameter error results if the value given is too large. For this
reason, if the number of points is to be increased and the number of curves to be
stored is to be reduced using the CBD command, then the CBD command should be
issued first.

NC New curve
Initializes the curve storage memory and status variables. All record of previously
taken curves is removed.

6-24
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

STR [n] Storage interval control

Sets the time interval between successive points being acquired under the TD or TDC
commands. n specifies the time interval in ms with a resolution of 5 ms, input values
being rounded up to a multiple of 5. The longest interval that can be specified is
1000000 s corresponding to one point in about 12 days.

In addition, n may be set to 0, which sets the rate of data storage to the curve buffer
to 800 Hz. However this only allows storage of the X and Y channel outputs. There is
no need to issue a CBD 3 command to set this up since it happens automatically when
acquisition starts.

If the time constant is set to 5 ms or longer, then the actual time constant applied to
the stored X and Y channel output values will be 640 µs, but if it is set to a shorter
value then this will be the time constant actually used.

TD Take data
Initiates data acquisition. Acquisition starts at the current position in the curve buffer
and continues at the rate set by the STR command until the buffer is full.

TDT n Take data triggered

Sets the instrument so that data acquisition will be initiated on receipt of a trigger at
the TRIG connector on the rear panel. Two triggered modes are possible, as set by
the value of n:

n function
0 One complete curve is acquired for each trigger
1 One complete set of data points is acquired for each trigger. Note that in this
mode the maximum trigger rate is 200 Hz and the storage interval control setting
has no effect

TDC Take data continuously

Initiates data acquisition. Acquisition starts at the current position in the curve buffer
and continues at the rate set by the STR command until halted by an HC command.
The buffer is circular in the sense that when it has been filled, new data overwrites
earlier points.

EVENT [n] Event marker control

During a curve acquisition, if bit 13 in the CBD command has been asserted, the
lock-in amplifier stores the value of the Event variable at each sample point. This can
be used as a marker indicating the point at which an experimental parameter was
changed. The EVENT command is used to set this variable to any value between 0
and 32767.

HC Halt curve acquisition

Halts curve acquisition in progress. It is effective during both single (data acquisition
initiated by TD command) and continuous (data acquisition initiated by TDC
command) curve acquisitions. The curve may be restarted by means of the TD, TDT
or TDC command, as appropriate.

6-25
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

M Curve acquisition status monitor

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with four values that provide information
concerning data acquisition, as follows:

First value, Curve Acquisition Status: a number with five possible values, defined
by the following table:

First Value Significance

0 No curve activity in progress
1 Acquisition via TD command in progress and running
2 Acquisition via TDC command in progress and running
5 Acquisition via TD command in progress but halted by HC command
6 Acquisition via TDC command in progress but halted by HC command

Second value, Number of Sweeps Acquired: This number is incremented each time
a TD is completed and each time a full cycle is completed on a TDC acquisition. It is
zeroed by the NC command and also whenever a CBD or LEN command is applied
without parameters.

Third value, Status Byte: The same as the response to the ST command. The
number returned is the decimal equivalent of the status byte and refers to the
previously applied command.

Fourth value, Number of Points Acquired: This number is incremented each time a
point is taken. It is zeroed by the NC command and whenever CBD or LEN is applied
without parameters.

DC[.] n Dump acquired curve(s) to computer

In fixed point mode, causes a stored curve to be dumped via the computer interface in
decimal format.

In floating point mode the SEN curve (bit 4 in CBD) must have been stored if one or
more of the following outputs are required in order that the lock-in amplifier can
perform the necessary conversion from %FS to volts or amps:- X, Y, Magnitude,
Noise.

One curve at a time is transferred. The value of n is the bit number of the required
curve, which must have been stored by the most recent CBD command. Hence n can
range from 0 to 15, or 0 to 20 if a dual mode is active. If for example CBD 5 had
been sent, equivalent to asserting bits 0 and 2, then the X and Magnitude outputs
would be stored. The permitted values of n would therefore be 0 and 2, so that DC 0
would transfer the X channel output curve and DC 2 the Magnitude curve.

The computer program’s subroutine which reads the responses to the DC command
needs to run a FOR...NEXT loop of length equal to the value set by the LEN (curve
length) command.

Note that when using this command with the GPIB interface the serial poll must be
used. After sending the DC command, perform repeated serial polls until bit 7 is set,

6-26
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

indicating that the instrument has an output waiting to be read. Then perform
repeated reads in a loop, waiting each time until bit 7 is set indicating that a new
value is available. The loop should continue until bit 1 is set, indicating that the
transfer is completed.

DCT n Dump acquired curves to computer in table format

This command is similar to the DC command described above, but allows transfer of
several curves at a time and only operates in fixed point mode. Stored curve(s) are
transferred via the computer interface in decimal format.

In single reference mode, the DCT parameter is an integer between 1 and 65,535,
being the decimal equivalent of a 16-bit binary number. In either of the dual reference
modes it is an integer between 1 and 2,097,151, being the decimal equivalent of a
21-bit binary number. When a given bit in the number is asserted, the corresponding
curve is selected for transfer. When a bit is negated, the curve is not transferred. The
bit corresponding to each curve is shown in the table below:

Bit Decimal value Curve and output range

0 1 X Output (±10000 FS)
1 2 Y Output (±10000 FS)
2 4 Magnitude Output (±10000 FS)
3 8 Phase (±18000 = ±180°)
4 16 Sensitivity setting (1 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)
5 32 ADC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
6 64 ADC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
7 128 ADC3 (-32768 to + 32767)
8 256 DAC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
9 512 DAC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
10 1024 Noise (±10000 FS)
11 2048 Ratio (±10000 FS)
12 4096 Log ratio (-3000 to +2000)
13 8192 EVENT variable (0 to 32767)
14 16384 Reference frequency bits 0 to 15 (mHz)
15 32768 Reference frequency bits 16 to 32 (mHz)

Dual modes only:-

16 65536 X2 Output (±10000 FS)
17 131072 Y2 Output (±10000 FS)
18 262144 Magnitude2 Output (+10000 FS)
19 524288 Phase2 Output (±18000 = ±180°)
20 1048576 Sensitivity2 setting (4 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)

The values of the selected curves at the same sample point are transferred as a group
in the order of the above table, separated by the chosen delimiter character and
terminated with the selected terminator. This continues until all the points have been
transferred.

As an example, suppose CBD 5 had been sent, equivalent to asserting bits 0 and 2,

6-27
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

then the X and Magnitude outputs would be stored. The permitted values of n would
therefore be 1, 4 and 5. DCT 1 and DCT 4 would only transfer one curve at a time,
but DCT 5 would transfer the X channel output curve and the Magnitude curve
simultaneously. A typical output data sequence would be:

<X channel output value1><delim><Magnitude value1><term>

<X channel output value2><delim><Magnitude value2><term>
<X channel output value3><delim><Magnitude value3><term>
<X channel output value4><delim><Magnitude value4><term>
<X channel output value5><delim><Magnitude value5><term>

etc., where <delim> and <term> are the delimiter and terminator characters
respectively.

The computer program’s subroutine which reads the responses to the DCT command
needs to run a FOR...NEXT loop of length equal to the value set by the LEN (curve
length) command, and must be able to separate the responses on each line for storage
or processing.

Note that when using this command with the GPIB interface the serial poll must be
used. After sending the DCT command, perform repeated serial polls until bit 7 is set,
indicating that the instrument has an output waiting to be read. Then perform
repeated reads in a loop, waiting each time until bit 7 is set indicating that a new
value is available. The loop should continue until bit 1 is set, indicating that the
transfer is completed.

6.4.10 Computer Interfaces (RS232 and GPIB)

RS [n1 [n2]] Set/read RS232 interface parameters
The value of n1 sets the baud rate of the RS232 interface according to the following
table:

n1 Baud rate (bits per second)

0 75
1 110
2 134.5
3 150
4 300
5 600
6 1200
7 1800
8 2000
9 2400
10 4800
11 9600
12 19200

The lowest five bits in n2 control the other RS232 parameters according to the
following table:

6-28
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

bit number bit negated bit asserted

0 data + parity = 8 bits data + parity = 9 bits
1 no parity bit 1 parity bit
2 even parity odd parity
3 echo disabled echo enabled
4 prompt disabled prompt enabled

GP [n1 [n2]] Set/Read GPIB parameters

n1 sets the GPIB address in the range 0 to 31

n2 sets the GPIB terminator and the test echo function according to the following
table:

n Terminator
0 [CR], test echo disabled
1 [CR], test echo enabled
2 [CR,LF], test echo disabled
3 [CR,LF], test echo enabled
4 no terminator, test echo disabled
5 no terminator, test echo enabled

In all cases the EOI line is asserted with the last byte of a response.

When the test echo is on, every character transmitted or received via the GPIB port is
echoed to the RS232 port. This is provided solely as an aid to program development
and should not be enabled during normal operation of the instrument.

\N n Address command
When the model 7260 is daisy-chained with other compatible instruments this
command will change which instrument is addressed. All daisy-chained instruments
receive commands but only the currently addressed instrument will implement or
respond to the commands. The exception is the \N n command. If n matches the
address set from the front panel the instrument will switch into addressed mode. If n
does not match the address set from the front panel the instrument will switch into
unaddressed mode. Note that the \N n command does not change the address of an
instrument but which instrument is addressed.

NOTE: All instruments must have a unique address.

DD [n] Define delimiter control

The value of n, which can be set to 13 or from 32 to 125, determines the ASCII value
of the character sent by the lock-in amplifier to separate two numeric values in a two-
value response, such as that generated by the MP (magnitude and phase) command.

6-29
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

ST Report status byte

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the status byte, an integer between 0 and
255, which is the decimal equivalent of a binary number with the following bit-
significance:

Bit 0 Command complete

Bit 1 Invalid command
Bit 2 Command parameter error
Bit 3 Reference unlock
Bit 4 Overload
Bit 5 New ADC values available after external trigger
Bit 6 Asserted SRQ
Bit 7 Data available

NOTE: this command is not normally used in GPIB communications, where the
status byte is accessed by performing a serial poll.

N Report overload byte

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the overload byte, an integer between 0
and 255, which is the decimal equivalent of a binary number with the following bit-
significance:

Bit 0 not used

Bit 1 CH1 output overload (> ±120 %FS)
Bit 2 CH2 output overload (> ±120 %FS)
Bit 3 Y channel output overload (> ±300 %FS)
Bit 4 X channel output overload (> ±300 %FS)
Bit 5 not used
Bit 6 input overload
Bit 7 reference unlock

MSK [n] Set/read service request mask byte

The value of n sets the SRQ mask byte in the range 0 to 255

REMOTE [n] Remote only (front panel lock-out) control

Allowed values of n are 0 and 1. When n is equal to 1, the lock-in amplifier enters
remote only mode in which the front panel control functions are inoperative and the
instrument can only be controlled with the RS232 or the GPIB interfaces. When n is
equal to 0, the front panel controls function normally.

6.4.11 Instrument Identification

ID Identification
Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the number 7260.

REV Report firmware revision

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the firmware revision number. This gives
a four line response which the controlling program must be able to accept.

6-30
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

VER Report firmware version

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the firmware version number. The
firmware version number is the number displayed on the front panel UserOptions2
menu.

6.4.12 Front Panel

DISP n1 [n2] Main Display menu control selector
Defines the three user-specified instrument controls appearing on the Main Display
menu (see section 5.3.01). n1 is the line number and is 1, 2 or 3 corresponding to the
upper-middle, lower-middle and bottom lines respectively and n2 selects the control to
be displayed on the specified line according to the following table:

n2 Control
0 Oscillator amplitude
1 Oscillator frequency
2 Reference frequency (display only)
3 DAC 1
4 DAC 2
5 DAC 3
6 DAC 4
7 Reference phase shifter
8 Reference phase shift in ±90° increments
9 Full-scale sensitivity
10 Time constant
11 X offset
12 Y offset

DISPMODE [n] Main Display menu output display type selector

The value of n configures the output display on the Main Display menu according to
the following table:

n Display type
0 Two large digital displays and two bar-graphs
1 Two large digital displays and two small digital displays
2 Four bar-graph displays

Note that in virtual reference mode the words “Virtual Ref” are shown in the bottom
display position.

DISPOUT n1 [n2] Main Display menu output selector

This command is used to specify which outputs are displayed on the Main Display
menu. Parameter n1 specifies the digital meter or bar-graph to modify, and can range
from 0 to 3, corresponding to the top, upper-middle, lower-middle and bottom
displays. Parameter n2 is used to choose which output appears on the chosen meter or
bar-graph, in accordance with the following table:-

6-31
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

Digital Meters and Bar-Graph Displays:-

n2 Output
0 ADC1
1 ADC2
3 X% or X1%
4 Y% or X2%
5 MAG% or R% or MAG1% or R1%
6 NOISE%
7 θ or PHA; θ1 or PHA1

Digital Meters only

8 Frequency
9 X V/I or X1 V/I
10 Y V/I or Y1 V/I
11 MAG V/I or R V/I or MAG1 V/I or R1 V/I
12 NOISE V/√Hz or A/√Hz

In dual reference and dual harmonic modes parameter n2 can also be set to the
following values to allow the additional outputs given by the second detection channel
to be displayed:-

Digital Meters and Bar-Graph Displays:-

n2 Output
13 X2%
14 Y2%
15 MAG2% or R2%
16 θ2 or PHA2

Digital Meters only

17 X2 V/I
18 Y2 V/I
19 MAG2 V/I or R2 V/I

Hence in order to fully set up the output displays it is necessary to send a

DISPMODE command and then send four DISPOUT commands to set up each of the
four displays.

KP Key-press identifier
The response to the KP command depends on whether a front panel key has been
pressed since the last time the command was issued, and if so, on the currently
displayed menu and actual key pressed.

If a key has not been pressed since the last KP command, the response is 0.
If a key has been pressed then the response is a number calculated as follows:-

KP response = (menu number × 32) + key number,

where menu number and key number are defined as follows:

6-32
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

Menu Menu Number

Main Display 0
Main Menu 1
Oscillator 2
Communications 3
RS232 Comms 4
Reference Channel or Dual Reference Channel 5
Signal Channel 6
Comms Test 7
Display Options 8
Display Setup 9
GPIB Comms 10
Output Channels or Output Channel (1) 11
“*” Command Options 12
DACs & ADCs 13
ADC3 Options 14
User Options 1 15
Equation 1 16
User Options 2 17
Auto Functions 18
Curve Buffer 19
Curve Select 20
ADC1&2 Options 21
Frequency Sweep 22
Amplitude Sweep 23
Virtual Reference (1) 24
Virtual Reference (2) 25
Output Channel (2) 26
Quick View 27
Equation 2 28
Digital Port 29
Single Graph 30
Double Graph 31

The key numbers generated by single key presses are shown in figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1, Key Number Identifier

If two keys are pressed simultaneously then the key number generated is as follows:

Pressing 1 and 2 = 21
Pressing 3 and 4 = 22
Pressing 5 and 6 = 23
Pressing 7 and 8 = 24
Pressing 9 and 10 = 25

6-33
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

Pressing 11 and 12 = 26
Pressing 13 and 14 = 27
Pressing 15 and 16 = 28

LTS [n] Lights on/off control

The value of n controls the front panel LEDs and LCD backlights according to the
following table:

n Selection
0 All lights off
1 Normal operation

6.4.13 Auto Default

ADF Auto Default command
This command will automatically set all the instrument controls and displays to the
factory set default values. However, if the command is used when the interface
parameters are at values other than their default settings, then communication will be
lost.

6.4.14 Dual Mode Commands

When either dual reference or dual harmonic modes are selected, some commands
change so that both channels can be controlled independently, as listed in the
following table:

Single Reference or Dual Reference or

Virtual Reference mode command Dual Harmonic mode command
EX not available
MAG[.] MAG1[.]
MAG2[.]
MP[.] MP1[.]
MP2[.]
PHA[.][n] PHA1[.][n]
PHA2[.][n]
REFP[.][n] REFP1[.][n]
REFP2[.][n]
REFN[n] REFN1[n]
REFN2[n] (n = 1 in dual
reference mode)
SEN[.][n] SEN1[.][n]
SEN2[.][n]
SLOPE[n] SLOPE1[n]
SLOPE2[n]
SWEEP not available
TC[.][n] TC1[.][n]
TC2[.][n]
X[.] X1[.]
X2[.]
XOF[n1[n2]] XOF1[n1[n2]]
XOF2[n1[n2]]

6-34
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

XY[.] XY1[.]
XY2[.]
Y[.] Y1[.]
Y2[.]
YOF[n1[n2]] YOF1[n1[n2]]
YOF2[n1[n2]]
AQN AQN1
AQN2
AS AS1
AS2
AXO AXO1
AXO2

6.5 Programming Examples

6.5.01 Introduction
This section gives some examples of the commands that need to be sent to the lock-in
amplifier for typical experimental situations.

6.5.02 Basic Signal Recovery

In a typical simple experiment, the computer is used to set the instrument controls and
then to record the chosen outputs, perhaps as a function of time. At sampling rates of
up to a few points per second, there is no need to use the internal curve buffer. The
commands to achieve this would therefore be similar to the following sequence:

IE 2 Set reference to external front panel input

VMODE 1 Single-ended voltage input mode
FET 1 10 MΩ input impedance using FET stage
AUTOMATIC 1 AC Gain control automatic
FLOAT 1 Float input connector shell using 1 kΩ to ground
LF 0 Turn off line frequency rejection filter
ASM Auto-Measure (assumes reference frequency > 1 Hz)
TC 12 Set time constant to 200 ms, since previous ASM changed it

Then the outputs could be read as follows:

X. Reads X channel output in volts

Y. Reads Y channel output in volts
MAG. Reads Magnitude in volts
PHA. Reads Phase in degrees
FRQ. Reads reference frequency in hertz

The controlling program would send a new output command each time a new reading
were required. Note that a good “rule of thumb” is to wait for a period of five time-
constants after the input signal has changed before recording a new value. Hence in a
scanning type experiment, the program should issue the commands to whatever
equipment causes the input signal to the lock-in amplifier to change, wait for five
time-constants, and then record the required output.

6-35
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

6.5.03 Frequency Response Measurement

In this example, the lock-in amplifier’s internal oscillator output signal is fed via the
filter stage under test back to the instrument’s signal input. The oscillator frequency is
stepped between a lower and an upper frequency and the signal magnitude and phase
recorded. At sampling rates of up to a few points per second, there is no need to use
the internal curve buffer or oscillator frequency sweep generator. The commands to
achieve this would therefore be similar to the following sequence:

IE 0 Set reference mode to internal

VMODE 1 Single-ended voltage input mode
FET 1 10 MΩ input impedance using FET stage
AUTOMATIC 1 AC Gain control automatic
FLOAT 1 Float input connector shell using 1 kΩ to ground
LF 0 Turn off line frequency rejection filter
OA. 1.0 Set oscillator amplitude to 1.0 V r.m.s.
OF. 100.0 Set oscillator frequency to 100 Hz (starting frequency)
SEN 27 Set sensitivity to 1 V full-scale
TC 10 Set time constant to 50 ms
AQN Auto-Phase

The frequency sweep would be performed and the outputs recorded by sending the
following commands from a FOR...NEXT program loop:

OF. XX Set oscillator frequency to new value XX hertz

Software delay of 250 ms (5 × 50 ms) allowing output to stabilize
MAG. Read Magnitude in volts
PHA. Read Phase in degrees
FRQ. Read reference frequency in hertz. This would be same as the
oscillator frequency since the unit is operating in the internal
reference mode.

until the stop frequency is reached.

6.5.04 X and Y Output Curve Storage Measurement

In this example, the lock-in amplifier is measuring a current input signal applied to
the B input connector and the measured X channel output and Y channel output are
recorded for 10 seconds at a 100 Hz sampling rate. The acquired curves as read back
to the computer are required in floating point mode.

The sequence of commands is therefore as follows:

IE 2 Set reference mode to external front panel input

IMODE 1 High bandwidth current input mode
AUTOMATIC 1 AC Gain control automatic
FLOAT 1 Float input connector shell using 1 kΩ to ground
LF 0 Turn off line frequency rejection filter
SEN 18 Set sensitivity to 1 nA full-scale
TC 10 Set time constant to 50 ms
AQN Auto-Phase

6-36
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

Now the curve storage needs to be set up:

NC Clear and reset curve buffer

CBD 19 Stores X channel output, Y channel output and sensitivity (i.e. bits 0,
1 and 4)
LEN 1000 Number of points = 100 Hz × 10 seconds
STR 10 Store a point every 10 ms (1/100 Hz)

The data is acquired by issuing:

TD Acquires data

As the acquisition is running, the M command reports the status of the curve
acquisition. Once this indicates the acquisition is complete (i.e. parameter 1 = 0,
parameter 2 = 1), the acquired data may be transferred to the computer using:

DC. 0 Transfers X channel output values in floating point mode.

DC. 1 Transfers Y channel output values in floating point mode.

The input routine of the program must be prepared to read and store 1000 responses
to each of these commands.

6.5.05 Transient Recorder

In this example, the signal recovery capabilities of the lock-in amplifier are not used,
but the auxiliary inputs are. The voltage applied to the ADC1 input on the rear panel
is sampled and digitized at a rate of approximately 40 kHz, with the values being
stored to the curve buffer. Sampling is required to start on receipt of a trigger at the
TRIG IN connector on the rear panel and must last for 500 ms.

The sequence of commands is therefore as follows:

NC Clear and reset curve buffer

LEN 20000 500 ms recording time at 40 kHz = 20,000 points
TADC 6 Set ADC1 sampling to burst mode, fixed rate (40 kHz), external
trigger, and arm trigger

As soon as a trigger occurs, the acquisition starts. Once it completes the acquired
data may be transferred to the computer using:-

DC. 5 Transfers ADC1 values in floating point mode

The input routine of the program must be prepared to read and store 20,000
responses to this command.

6-37
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

6.5.06 Frequency Response Measurement using Curve

Storage and Frequency Sweep
In this example, a more sophisticated version of that given in section 6.5.03, the
internal oscillator frequency sweep generator is used in conjunction with curve
storage, allowing the acquisition of a frequency response without the need for the
computer to perform the frequency setting function for each point.

As before, the lock-in amplifier’s internal oscillator output signal is fed via the filter
stage under test to the signal input. The oscillator frequency is stepped between a
lower and an upper frequency and the signal magnitude and phase are recorded.

The required sequence of commands is therefore as follows:-

IE 0 Set reference mode to internal

VMODE 1 Single-ended voltage input mode
FET 1 10 MΩ input impedance using FET stage
AUTOMATIC 1 AC Gain control automatic
FLOAT 1 Float input connector shell using 1 kΩ to ground
LF 0 Turn off line frequency rejection filter
OA. 1.0 Set oscillator amplitude to 1.0 V r.m.s.
OF. 100.0 Set initial oscillator frequency to 100 Hz so that AQN runs
correctly
SEN 27 Set sensitivity to 1 V full-scale
TC 8 Set time constant to 10 ms
AQN Auto-Phase

The next group of commands set up the frequency sweep:

FSTART. 100.0 Set initial oscillator frequency to 100 Hz

FSTOP. 1000.0 Set final oscillator frequency to 1000 Hz
FSTEP. 10 1 Step size = 10 Hz, linear law
SRATE. 0.1 100 ms per step

There will therefore be 100 steps (100 Hz to 1000 Hz inclusive in 10 Hz steps). Now
specify the curve storage:

NC Clear and reset curve buffer

CBD 49180 Stores Magnitude, Phase, Sensitivity and Frequency (i.e. bits
2, 3, 4, 14 and 15)
LEN 100 Number of points = 100
STR 100 Store a point every 100 ms - must match SRATE parameter

The data may now be acquired by issuing the compound command:

TD; SWEEP 1 Starts sweep and curve acquisition

Note that the order of these two commands is important. If used as shown then the
data will be acquired and the oscillator frequency will be changed at each data point,
prior to waiting for the time set by the SRATE and STR commands. This gives

6-38
 Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

sufficient time for the instrument amplitude output to stabilize after each change of
frequency.

If the commands were used in the reverse order (i.e. SWEEP 1; TD) then the
output(s) would never have time to settle by the time at which they were recorded.

The frequency sweep starts and the magnitude and phase outputs are recorded to the
curve buffer. As it runs the M command reports the status of the acquisition, and
once this indicates it is complete (i.e. parameter 1 = 0, parameter 2 = 1), the acquired
data may be transferred to the computer using:

DC. 2 Transfers Magnitude curve

DC. 3 Transfers Phase curve
DC 14 Transfers Reference frequency - lower 16 bits
DC 15 Transfers Reference frequency - upper 16 bits

6-39
Chapter 6, COMPUTER OPERATION

6-40
Specifications

Appendix A
Measurement Modes
X In-phase 
Y Quadrature  The unit can simultaneously present any
R Magnitude  four of these as outputs
θ Phase Angle 
Noise 

Harmonic nF
n < 65536, nF < 60 kHz (internal reference)
n < 2048, nF < 250 kHz (external reference)

Dual Harmonic Simultaneously measures the signal at two

different harmonics of the reference frequency
(F1 and F2 < 20 kHz)

Dual Reference Simultaneously measures the signal at two

different reference frequencies (F1 and F2
< 20 kHz)

Virtual Reference Locks to and detects a signal without a reference

(100 Hz ≤ F ≤ 60 kHz)

Noise Measures noise in a given bandwidth centered at

the reference frequency F (F ≤ 60 kHz)

Operational Modes
Signal Recovery Normal low-noise mode, Baseband ≤ 60 kHz or
Highband > 60 kHz

Vector Voltmeter High precision mode (introduces 5 dB noise

penalty)

Displays
Cold fluorescent backlit 64 × 240 pixel dot-
matrix LCD giving digital, analog bar-graph
and graphical indication of measured signals.
Menu system with dynamic key function
allocation. On-screen context sensitive help.

A-1
Appendix A, SPECIFICATIONS

Signal Channel
Voltage Inputs
Modes A only, B only or Differential (A-B)
Full-scale Sensitivity 2 nV to 1 V in a 1-2-5 sequence
Dynamic Reserve > 100 dB
Impedance
FET Device 10 MΩ // 30 pF
Bipolar Device 10 kΩ // 30 pF
Maximum Safe Input 30 V pk-pk
Voltage Noise
FET Device 5 nV/√Hz at 1 kHz
Bipolar Device 2 nV/√Hz at 1 kHz
C.M.R.R > 100 dB at 1 kHz degrading by 6 dB/octave
Frequency Response 0.001 Hz to 250 kHz
Gain Accuracy 0.2 % typ, 0.6 % max. full bandwidth)
Distortion -90 dB THD (60 dB AC gain, 1 kHz)
Line Filter attenuates 50, 60, 100, 120 Hz
Grounding BNC shields can be grounded or floated via
1 kΩ to ground

Current Input
Mode Low-noise or Wide Bandwidth
Full-scale Sensitivity
Low-noise 2 fA to 10 nA in a 1-2-5 sequence
Wide Bandwidth 2 fA to 1 µA in a 1-2-5 sequence
Dynamic Reserve > 100 dB (with no signal filters)
Frequency Response
Low Noise -3 dB at 500 Hz
Wide Bandwidth -3 dB at 50 kHz
Impedance
Low Noise < 2.5 kΩ at 100 Hz
Wide Bandwidth < 250 Ω at 1 kHz
Noise
Low Noise 13 fA/√Hz at 500 Hz
Wide Bandwidth 130 fA/√Hz at 1 kHz
Gain Accuracy (midband)
Low Noise ≤ 0.6 % typ
Wide Bandwidth ≤ 0.6 % typ
Line Filter attenuates 50, 60, 100, 120 Hz
Grounding BNC shields can be grounded or floated via
1 kΩ to ground

Reference Channel
TTL Input (rear panel)
Frequency Range 1 mHz to 250 kHz

Analog Input (front panel)

Impedance 1 MΩ // 30 pF

A-2
 Appendix A, SPECIFICATIONS

Sinusoidal Input
Level 1.0 V rms**
Frequency Range 1 Hz to 250 kHz
Squarewave Input
Level 100 mV rms**
Frequency Range 300 mHz to 250 kHz

**Note: Lower levels can be used with the

analog input at the expense of increased phase
errors.

Phase
Set Resolution 0.01º increments
Accuracy
Frequency ≤ 60 kHz 0.25° typ, 0.75° max
Frequency > 60 kHz 0.5° typ, 0.75° max.
Noise at 100 ms TC, 12 dB/octave
Internal Reference < 0.0001º rms
External Reference < 0.01º rms at 1 kHz
Orthogonality 90º ±0.0001º
Drift < 0.01º/ºC below 10 kHz
< 0.1º/ºC above 10 kHz

Acquisition Time
Internal Reference instantaneous acquisition
External Reference 2 cycles + 50 ms

Demodulator and Output Processing

Description 2 x 18-bit ADCs driving two DSP elements
managed by a powerful 68000-series host
processor

Output Zero Stability

Digital Outputs No zero drift on all settings
Displays No zero drift on all settings
Analog Outputs < 5 ppm/ºC

Harmonic Rejection -90 dB

Time Constants
Digital Outputs 5 ms to 100 ks in a 1-2-5 sequence
Roll-off 6, 12, 18 and 24 dB/octave
Fast Outputs 10 µs to 640 µs in a binary sequence
Roll-off 6 dB/octave only

Synchronous Filter Operation Available for F < 20 Hz

Offset Auto and Manual on X and/or Y: ±300 % FS

A-3
Appendix A, SPECIFICATIONS

Oscillator
Frequency
Range 0.001 Hz to 250 kHz
Setting Resolution 0.001 Hz
Absolute Accuracy 25 ppm + 30 µHz

Distortion (THD) -80 dB at 1 kHz

Amplitude
Range 1 mV to 5 V
Setting Resolution
1 mV to 500 mV 1 mV
501 mV to 2 V 4 mV
2.001 V to 5 V 10 mV
Accuracy
0.001 Hz to 60 kHz ±0.3 %
60 kHz to 250 kHz ±0.5 %
Stability 50 ppm/ºC

Output
Impedance 50 Ω

Sweep
Amplitude Sweep
Output Range 0.000 to 5.000 V
Law Linear
Step Rate 20 Hz maximum (50 ms/step)
Frequency
Output Range 0.001 to 250.000 Hz
Law Linear or Logarithmic
Step Rate 20 Hz maximum (50 ms/step)

Auxiliary Inputs
ADC 1 and 2
Maximum Input ±10 V
Resolution 1 mV
Accuracy ±1 mV
Input Impedance 1 MΩ // 30 pF
Sample Rate
ADC 1 only 40 kHz max.
ADC 1 and 2 13 kHz max.
Trigger Mode Internal, External or burst
Trigger input TTL compatible

ADC3 (integrating)
Maximum Input ±10 V
Input Impedance 1 MΩ // 30 pF
Sampling Time 10 ms to 2 s
Equivalent Resolution 12 to 20 bits, depending on sampling time

A-4
 Appendix A, SPECIFICATIONS

Outputs
CH1 CH2 Outputs
Function X, Y, R, θ, Noise, Ratio, Log Ratio and User
Equations 1 & 2.
Amplitude ±10 V
Impedance 1 kΩ
Update Rate 200 Hz

Fast X Output
Time Constant 10 µs to 640 µs in a binary sequence
Slope 6 dB/octave
Amplitude ±10 V (100 % = ±2.5 V)
Update Rate 166 kHz
Output Impedance 1 kΩ

Fast Y Output
Time Constant 10 µs to 640 µs in a binary sequence
Slope 6 dB/octave
Amplitude ±10 V (100 % = ±2.5 V)
Update Rate 166 kHz
Output Impedance 1 kΩ

Signal Monitor
Amplitude ±10 V FS
Impedance 1 kΩ

Aux D/A Output 1, 2, 3 & 4

Maximum Output ±10 V
Resolution 1 mV
Output Impedance 1 kΩ

8-bit Digital Output 8 TTL compatible lines that can be

independently set high or low to activate
external equipment

Reference Output
Waveform 0 to 5 V squarewave
Impedance TTL compatible

Power - Low Voltage ±15 V at 100 mA rear panel DIN connector for
powering EG&G preamplifiers

A-5
Appendix A, SPECIFICATIONS

Data Storage
Data Buffer
Size 32k 16-bit data points, may be organized as
1×32k, 2×16k, 3×10.6k, 4×8k, etc.
Max Storage Rate
From LIA up to 800 16-bit values per second
From ADC1 up to 40,000 16-bit values per second

Interfaces
RS232, IEEE-488. A second RS232 port is
provided to allow “daisy-chain” connection and
control of up to 16 units from a single RS232
computer port.

General
Power Requirements
Voltage 110/120/220/240 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power < 40 VA

Dimensions
Width 350 mm (13.75 ")
Depth 415 mm (16.5 “)
Height
With feet 105 mm (4.1 “)
Without feet 91 mm (3.6 “)

Weight 8.1 kg (18 lb)

All specifications subject to change without notification

A-6
Pinouts

Appendix B

B.1 RS232 Connector Pinout

Figure B-1, RS232 and AUX RS232 Connector (Female)

Pin Function Description

2 RXD Data In
3 TXD Data Out
5 GND Signal Ground
7 RTS Request to Send - Always +12 V

All other pins are not connected

B.2 Preamplifier Power Connector Pinout

Figure B-2, Preamplifier Power Connector

Pin Function
1 -15 V
2 Ground
3 +15 V

Pins 4 and 5 are not connected. Shell is shield ground.

B-1
Appendix B, PINOUTS

B.3 Digital Output Port Connector

Figure B-3, Digital Output Port Connector

8-bit TTL-compatible output set from the front panel or via the computer interfaces;
each line can drive 3 LSTTL loads. This connector mates with a 20-pin IDC Header
Plug. The pinout is as follows.

PIN # FUNCTION

1 GROUND
2 GROUND
3 D0
4 GROUND
5 D1
6 GROUND
7 D2
8 GROUND
9 D3
10 GROUND
11 D4
12 GROUND
13 D5
14 GROUND
15 D6
16 GROUND
17 D7
18 GROUND
19 +5 V
20 +5 V

D0 = Least Significant Bit

D7 = Most Significant Bit

B-2
Demonstration Programs

Appendix C

C.1 Simple Terminal Emulator

This is a short terminal emulator with minimal facilities, which will run on a PC-compatible computer in a
Microsoft GWBASIC or QuickBASIC environment, or can be compiled with a suitable compiler.

10 ‘MINITERM 9-Feb-96
20 CLS : PRINT “Lockin RS232 parameters must be set to 9600 baud, 7 DATA bits, 1 stop
bit and even parity”
30 PRINT “Hit <ESC> key to exit”
40 OPEN “COM1:9600,E,7,1,CS,DS” FOR RANDOM AS #1
50 ‘..............................
60 ON ERROR GOTO 180
70 ‘..............................
100 WHILE (1)
110 B$ = INKEY$
120 IF B$ = CHR$(27) THEN CLOSE #1: ON ERROR GOTO 0: END
130 IF B$ <> “” THEN PRINT #1, B$;
140 LL% = LOC(1)
150 IF LL% > 0 THEN A$ = INPUT$(LL%, #1): PRINT A$;
160 WEND
170 ‘..............................
180 PRINT “ERROR NO.”; ERR: RESUME

C.2 RS232 Control Program with Handshakes

[Link] is a user interface program which illustrates the principles of the echo handshake. The
program will run on a PC-compatible computer either in a Microsoft GWBASIC or QuickBASIC
environment, or in compiled form.

The subroutines in RSCOM2 are recommended for incorporation into the user’s own programs.

10 ‘RSCOM2 9-Feb-96
20 CLS : PRINT “Lockin RS232 parameters must be set to 9600 baud, 7 data bits, 1 stop
bit, even parity”
30 OPEN “COM1:9600,E,7,1,CS,DS” FOR RANDOM AS #1
40 CR$ = CHR$(13) ‘ carriage return
50 ‘
60 ‘...main loop..................
70 WHILE 1 ‘ infinite loop
80 INPUT “command (00 to exit) “; B$ ‘ no commas are allowed in B$
90 IF B$ = “00” THEN END
100 B$ = B$ + CR$ ‘ append a carriage return

C-1
Appendix C, DEMONSTRATION PROGRAMS

110 GOSUB 180 ‘ output the command B$

120 GOSUB 310: PRINT Z$; ‘ read and display response
130 IF A$ = “?” THEN GOSUB 410: GOSUB 470 ‘ if “?” prompt fetch STATUS%
140 ‘ and display message
150 WEND ‘ return to start of loop
160 ‘
170 ‘
180 ‘...output the string B$..............
190 ON ERROR GOTO 510 ‘ enable error trapping
200 IF LOC(1) > 0 THEN A$ = INPUT$(LOC(1), #1) ’ clear input buffer
210 ON ERROR GOTO 0 ‘ disable error trapping
220 FOR J1% = 1 TO LEN(B$) ‘ LEN(B$) is number of bytes
230 C$ = MID$(B$, J1%, 1): PRINT #1, C$; ‘ send byte
240 WHILE LOC(1) = 0: WEND ‘ wait for byte in input buffer
250 A$ = INPUT$(1, #1) ‘ read input buffer
260 IF A$ <> C$ THEN PRINT “handshake error”’ input byte should be echo
270 NEXT J1% ‘ next byte to be sent or
280 RETURN ‘ return if no more bytes
290 ‘
300 ‘
310 ‘....read response..................
320 A$ = “”: Z$ = “”
330 WHILE (A$ <> “*” AND A$ <> “?”) ‘ read until prompt received
340 Z$ = Z$ + A$ ‘ append next byte to string
350 WHILE LOC(1) = 0: WEND ‘ wait for byte in input buffer
360 A$ = INPUT$(1, #1) ‘ read byte from buffer
370 WEND ‘ next byte to be read
380 RETURN ‘ return if it is a prompt
390 ‘
400 ‘
410 ‘....fetch status byte..............
420 B$ = “ST” + CR$ ‘ “ST” is the status command
430 GOSUB 180 ‘ output the command
440 GOSUB 310 ‘ read response into Z$
450 STATUS% = VAL(Z$) ‘ convert to integer
460 RETURN
470 ‘....instrument error message.......
480 PRINT “Error prompt, status byte = “; STATUS% ‘ bits are defined in manual
490 PRINT
500 RETURN
510 ‘....I/O error routine..............
520 RESUME

C-2
 Appendix C, DEMONSTRATION PROGRAMS

C.3 GPIB User Interface Program

[Link] is a user interface program which illustrates the principles of the use of the serial poll status
byte to coordinate the command and data transfer.

The program runs under Microsoft GWBASIC or QuickBASIC on a PC-compatible computer fitted with a
National Instruments IEEE-488 interface card and the [Link] software installed in the [Link]
file. The program BIB.M, and the first three lines of GPCOM, are supplied by the card manufacturer and
must be the correct version for the particular version of the interface card in use. The interface card may be set
up, using the program [Link], to set EOI with the last byte of Write in which case no terminator is
required. (Read operations are automatically terminated on EOI which is always sent by the lock-in amplifier).
Normally, the options called ‘high-speed timing’, ‘interrupt jumper setting’, and ‘DMA channel’ should all be
disabled.

The principles of using the Serial Poll Status Byte to control data transfer, as implemented in the main loop of
GPCOM, are recommended for incorporation into the user’s own programs.

10 ‘GPCOM 9-Feb-96
20 ‘....the following three lines and BIB.M are supplied by the.......
30 ‘....manufacturer of the GPIB card, must be correct version........
40 CLEAR , 60000!: IBINIT1 = 60000!: IBINIT2 = IBINIT1 + 3: BLOAD “BIB.M”, IBINIT1
50 CALL IBINIT1 (IBFIND, IBTRG, IBCLR, IBPCT, IBSIC, IBLOC, IBPPC, IBBNA, IBONL, IBRSC,
IBSRE, IBRSV, IBPAD, IBSAD, IBIST, IBDMA, IBEOS, IBTMO, IBEOT, IBRDF, IBWRTF,
IBTRAP)
60 CALL IBINIT2 (IBGTS, IBCAC, IBWAIT, IBPOKE, IBWRT, IBWRTA, IBCMD, IBCMDA, IBRD,
IBRDA, IBSTOP, IBRPP, IBRSP, IBDIAG, IBXTRC, IBRDI, IBWRTI, IBRDIA, IBWRTIA, IBSTA%,
IBERR%, IBCNT%)
70 ‘.................................................
80 CLS : PRINT “DEVICE MUST BE SET TO CR TERMINATOR”
90 ‘....assign access code to interface board........
100 BDNAME$ = “GPIB0”
110 CALL IBFIND(BDNAME$, GPIB0%)
120 IF GPIB0% < 0 THEN PRINT “board assignment error”: END
130 ‘....send INTERFACE CLEAR.........................
140 CALL IBSIC(GPIB0%)
150 ‘....set bus address, assign access code to device..........
160 SUCCESS% = 0
170 WHILE SUCCESS% = 0
180 INPUT “BUS ADDRESS “; A%
190 DEVNAME$ = “DEV” + RIGHT$(STR$(A%), LEN(STR$(A%)) - 1)
200 CALL IBFIND(DEVNAME$, DEV%) ‘ assign access code
210 IF DEV% < 0 THEN PRINT “device assignment error”: END
220 A$ = CHR$(13): GOSUB 480 ‘ test: write <CR> to bus
230 IF IBSTA% > 0 THEN SUCCESS% = 1
240 IF (IBSTA% < 0 AND IBERR% = 2) THEN BEEP: PRINT “NO DEVICE AT THAT ADDRESS “;
250 WEND
260 ‘....send SELECTED DEVICE CLEAR...................
270 CALL IBCLR(DEV%)
280 ‘....set timeout to 1 second......................

C-3
Appendix C, DEMONSTRATION PROGRAMS

290 V% = 11: CALL IBTMO(DEV%, V%)

300 ‘....set status print flag........................
310 INPUT “Display status byte y/n “; R$
320 IF R$ = “Y” OR R$ = “y” THEN DS% = 1 ELSE DS% = 0
330 ‘....main loop....................................
340 WHILE 1 ‘ infinite loop
350 INPUT “command (00 to exit) “; A$
360 IF A$ = “00” THEN END
370 A$ = A$ ‘ CHR$(13) ‘ terminator is <CR>
380 GOSUB 480 ‘ write A$ to bus
390 S% = 0 ‘ initialize S%
400 WHILE (S% AND 1) = 0 ‘ while command not complete
410 GOSUB 530 ‘ serial poll, returns S%
420 IF DS% THEN PRINT “S%= “; S%
430 IF (S% AND 128) THEN GOSUB 500: PRINT B$ ‘ read bus into B$ and print
440 WEND
445 IF (S% AND 4) THEN PRINT “parameter error”
450 IF (S% AND 2) THEN PRINT “invalid command”
460 WEND
470 ‘....end of main loop.............................
480 ‘....write string to bus..........................
490 CALL IBWRT(DEV%, A$): RETURN
500 ‘....read string from bus.........................
510 B$ = SPACE$(32) ‘ B$ is buffer
520 CALL IBRD(DEV%, B$): RETURN
530 ‘......serial poll................................
540 CALL IBRSP(DEV%, S%): RETURN

C-4
Cable Diagrams

Appendix D

D.1 RS232 Cable Diagrams

Users who choose to use the RS232 interface to connect the model 7260 lock-in
amplifier to a standard serial port on a computer will need to use one of two types of
cable. The only difference between them is the number of pins used on the connector
which goes to the computer. One has 9 pins and the other 25; both are null-modem
(also called modem eliminator) cables in that some of the pins are cross-connected.

Users with reasonable practical skills can easily assemble the required cables from
parts which are widely available through computer stores and electronics components
suppliers. The required interconnections are given in figures D-1 and D-2.

Figure D-1, Interconnecting RS232 Cable Wiring Diagram

D-1
Appendix D, CABLE DIAGRAMS

Figure D-2, Interconnecting RS232 Cable Wiring Diagram

D-2
Alphabetical Listing of Commands

Appendix E

ACGAIN [n] AC Gain control

Sets the gain of the signal channel amplifier. Values of n from 0 to 9 can be entered,
corresponding to the range 0 dB to 90 dB in 10 dB steps.

ADC[.] n Read auxiliary analog to digital inputs

The response for ADC1 and ADC2 in fixed point mode is an integer in the range
-12000 to +12000, corresponding to voltages from -12.000 V to +12.000 V. In
floating point mode it is in volts.

ADC3 is an integrating converter. The response for ADC3 is fixed point only, and
depends on the sample time as set by the ADC3TIME command. The full-scale
response with a 1 s sample time is ±500000 for ±10 V input. The response is
proportional to the sample time e.g. 100 ms sample time gives a full-scale response of
±50000.

ADC3TIME [n] ADC3 Sample time.

n sets the ADC3 sample time in milliseconds in the range 10 ms to 2 s in 10 ms
increments. If a number is entered which is within the legal range but not a multiple
of 10 ms then it will be rounded down to the nearest multiple of 10 ms.

ADF Auto Default command

This command will automatically set all the instrument controls and displays to the
factory set default values. However, if the command is used when the interface
parameters are at values other than their default settings, then communication will be
lost.

AQN Auto-Phase (auto quadrature null)

AS Perform an Auto-Sensitivity operation

ASTART[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude sweep start amplitude

Sets the start amplitude for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator amplitude, in
the range 0 to 5.000 V

In fixed point mode, n is in millivolts r.m.s.

In floating point mode n is in volts r.m.s.

ASTEP[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude sweep step size

Sets the amplitude step size for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator
amplitude, in the range 0 to 5.000 V

In fixed point mode, n is in millivolts r.m.s.

In floating point mode n is in volts r.m.s.

E-1
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

ASTOP[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude sweep stop amplitude

Sets the stop amplitude for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator amplitude, in
the range 0 to 5.000 V

In fixed point mode, n is in millivolts r.m.s.

In floating point mode n is in volts r.m.s.

ASM Perform an Auto-Measure operation

AUTOMATIC [n] AC Gain automatic control

n Status
0 AC Gain is under manual control, either using the front panel or the ACGAIN
command
1 Automatic AC Gain control is activated, with the gain being adjusted according
to the full-scale sensitivity setting

AXO Auto-Offset

BURSTRATE [n] Sets the burst mode sampling rate for ADC1 and ADC2
n sets the sample rate for the Variable Rate burst modes according to the following
equations:

When storing only to ADC1:

(i.e. TADC 2, TADC 4, TADC 6 and TADC 8)

 16,000,000 
Sample Rate =   Hz
 ((25 × n) + 157 

When storing to ADC1 and ADC 2:

(i.e. TADC 3, TADC 5, TADC 7 and TADC 9)

 16,000,000 
Sample Rate =   Hz
((25 × n) +1031 

Note that these equations apply only to units manufactured after December 1995.
Earlier instruments used a 16.384 MHz instead of a 16.0 MHz crystal, so the above
equations should be modified accordingly by replacing the 16,000,000 figure with
16,384,000.

For example when n = 20, the sample rate will be 24,353 Hz for ADC1 for an
instrument with a 16.0 MHz crystal, and 24,937 Hz for a unit with a 16.384 MHz
crystal.

BYTE [n] Digital output port control

The value of n, in the range 0 to 255, determines the bits to be output on the rear
panel digital output port. When n = 0, all outputs are low, and when n = 255, all are
high.

E-2
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

CBD [n] Curve buffer define

Defines which data outputs are stored in the curve buffer when subsequent TD (take
data), TDT (take data triggered) or TDC (take data continuously) commands are
issued. Up to 16 (or 21 in dual reference and dual harmonic modes) curves, or
outputs, may be acquired, as specified by the CBD parameter.

The CBD parameter is an integer between 0 and 65,535, being the decimal equivalent
of a 16-bit binary word. In either of the dual reference modes, it is an integer between
1 and 2,097,151, being the decimal equivalent of a 21-bit binary number. When a
given bit is asserted, the corresponding output is selected for storage. When a bit is
negated, the output is not stored. The bit function and range for each output are
shown in the table below:

Bit Decimal value Output and range

0 1 X Output (±10000 FS)
1 2 Y Output (±10000 FS)
2 4 Magnitude Output (+10000 FS)
3 8 Phase (±18000 = ±180°)
4 16 Sensitivity setting (1 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)
5 32 ADC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
6 64 ADC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
7 128 ADC3 (-32768 to + 32767)
8 256 DAC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
9 512 DAC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
10 1024 Noise (±10000 FS)
11 2048 Ratio (±10000 FS)
12 4096 Log ratio (-3000 to +2000)
13 8192 EVENT variable (0 to 32767)
14 16384 Reference frequency bits 0 to 15 (mHz)
15 32768 Reference frequency bits 16 to 32 (mHz)

Dual modes only:-

16 65536 X2 Output (±10000 FS)
17 131072 Y2 Output (±10000 FS)
18 262144 Magnitude2 Output (+10000 FS)
19 524288 Phase2 Output (±18000 = ±180°)
20 1048576 Sensitivity2 setting (4 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)

32768 points are available for data storage, shared equally between the specified
curves. For example, if 16 outputs are stored then the maximum number of storage
points would be 2048 (i.e. 32768/16). The LEN command sets the actual curve
length, which cannot therefore be longer than 32768 divided by the number of curves
selected. If more curves are requested than can be stored with the current buffer
length, then the buffer length will be automatically reduced. Its actual length can of
course be determined by sending the LEN command without a parameter.

The reason why bit 4 and, for dual reference modes, bit 20, which store both the
sensitivity and the IMODE setting, are needed, is to allow the instrument to transfer
the acquired curves to the computer in floating point mode. Without this information,
the unit would not be able to determine the correct calibration to apply.

E-3
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

Curves 14 and 15 store the reference frequency in millihertz. The calculation needed
to translate these two 16-bit values to one 32-bit value is:

Reference Frequency = (65536 × value in Curve 15) + (value in Curve 14)

Note that the CBD command directly determines the allowable parameters for the DC
and HC commands. It also interacts with the LEN command and affects the values
reported by the M command.

CH n1 [n2] Analog output control

Defines what outputs appear on the CH1 and CH2 connectors on the rear panel
according to the following table:

n2 Signal
0 X %FS
1 Y %FS
2 Magnitude %FS
3 Phase 1:- +9 V = +180°, -9 V = -180°
4 Phase 2:- +9 V = 360°, - 9 V = 0°
5 Noise %FS
6 Ratio:- (1000 × X)/ADC 1
7 Log Ratio:- log10 (X/ADC1)
8 Equation 1
9 Equation 2

Dual modes only:-

10 X2 %FS
11 Y2 %FS
12 Magnitude2 %FS
13 Phase2 1:- +9 V = +180°, -9 V = -180°
14 Phase2 2:- +9 V = 360°, - 9 V = 0°

n1 is compulsory and is either 1 for CH1 or 2 for CH2

CP [n] Input connector shield float/ground control

n Coupling mode
0 AC
1 DC

DAC[.] n1 [n2] Auxiliary DAC output controls

The first parameter n1, which specifies the DAC, is compulsory and is either 1, 2, 3
or 4.

The value of n2 specifies the voltage to be output.

In fixed point mode it is an integer in the range -12000 to +12000, corresponding to

voltages from -12.000 V to +12.000 V.

In floating point mode it is in volts.

E-4
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

DC[.] n Dump acquired curve(s) to computer

In fixed point mode, causes a stored curve to be dumped via the computer interface in
decimal format.

In floating point mode the SEN curve (bit 4 in CBD) must have been stored if one or
more of the following outputs are required in order that the lock-in amplifier can
perform the necessary conversion from %FS to volts or amps:- X, Y, Magnitude,
Noise.

One curve at a time is transferred. The value of n is the bit number of the required
curve, which must have been stored by the most recent CBD command. Hence n can
range from 0 to 15, or 0 to 20 if a dual mode is active. If for example CBD 5 had
been sent, equivalent to asserting bits 0 and 2, then the X and Magnitude outputs
would be stored. The permitted values of n would therefore be 0 and 2, so that DC 0
would transfer the X channel output curve and DC 2 the Magnitude curve.

The computer program’s subroutine which reads the responses to the DC command
needs to run a FOR...NEXT loop of length equal to the value set by the LEN (curve
length) command.

Note that when using this command with the GPIB interface the serial poll must be
used. After sending the DC command, perform repeated serial polls until bit 7 is set,
indicating that the instrument has an output waiting to be read. Then perform
repeated reads in a loop, waiting each time until bit 7 is set indicating that a new
value is available. The loop should continue until bit 1 is set, indicating that the
transfer is completed.

DCT n Dump acquired curves to computer in table format

This command is similar to the DC command described above, but allows transfer of
several curves at a time and only operates in fixed point mode. Stored curve(s) are
transferred via the computer interface in decimal format.

In single reference mode, the DCT parameter is an integer between 1 and 65,535,
being the decimal equivalent of a 16-bit binary number. In either of the dual reference
modes it is an integer between 1 and 2,097,151, being the decimal equivalent of a
21-bit binary number. When a given bit in the number is asserted, the corresponding
curve is selected for transfer. When a bit is negated, the curve is not transferred. The
bit corresponding to each curve is shown in the table below:

Bit Decimal value Curve and output range

0 1 X Output (±10000 FS)
1 2 Y Output (±10000 FS)
2 4 Magnitude Output (±10000 FS)
3 8 Phase (±18000 = ±180°)
4 16 Sensitivity setting (1 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)
5 32 ADC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
6 64 ADC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
7 128 ADC3 (-32768 to + 32767)
8 256 DAC1 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)
9 512 DAC2 (±10000 = ±10.0 V)

E-5
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

Bit Decimal value Curve and output range

10 1024 Noise (±10000 FS)
11 2048 Ratio (±10000 FS)
12 4096 Log ratio (-3000 to +2000)
13 8192 EVENT variable (0 to 32767)
14 16384 Reference frequency bits 0 to 15 (mHz)
15 32768 Reference frequency bits 16 to 32 (mHz)

Dual modes only:-

16 65536 X2 Output (±10000 FS)
17 131072 Y2 Output (±10000 FS)
18 262144 Magnitude2 Output (+10000 FS)
19 524288 Phase2 Output (±18000 = ±180°)
20 1048576 Sensitivity2 setting (4 to 27) + IMODE (0, 1, 2 = 0, 32, 64)

The values of the selected curves at the same sample point are transferred as a group
in the order of the above table, separated by the chosen delimiter character and
terminated with the selected terminator. This continues until all the points have been
transferred.

DD [n] Define delimiter control

The value of n, which can be set to 13 or from 32 to 125, determines the ASCII value
of the character sent by the lock-in amplifier to separate two numeric values in a two-
value response, such as that generated by the MP (magnitude and phase) command.

DISP n1 [n2] Main Display menu control selector

Defines the three user-specified instrument controls appearing on the Main Display
menu (see section 5.3.01). n1 is the line number and is 1, 2 or 3 corresponding to the
upper-middle, lower-middle and bottom lines respectively and n2 selects the control to
be displayed on the specified line according to the following table:

n2 Control
0 Oscillator amplitude
1 Oscillator frequency
2 Reference frequency (display only)
3 DAC 1
4 DAC 2
5 DAC 3
6 DAC 4
7 Reference phase shifter
8 Reference phase shift in ±90° increments
9 Full-scale sensitivity
10 Time constant
11 X offset
12 Y offset

DISPMODE [n] Main Display menu output display type selector

n Display type
0 Two large digital displays and two bar-graphs
1 Two large digital displays and two small digital displays
2 Four bar-graph displays

E-6
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

Note that in virtual reference mode the words “Virtual Ref” are shown in the bottom
display position.

DISPOUT n1 [n2] Main Display menu output selector

This command is used to specify which outputs are displayed on the Main Display
menu. Parameter n1 specifies the digital meter or bar-graph to modify, and can range
from 0 to 3, corresponding to the top, upper-middle, lower-middle and bottom
displays. Parameter n2 is used to choose which output appears on the chosen meter or
bar-graph, in accordance with the following table:-

Digital Meters and Bar-Graph Displays:-

n2 Output
0 ADC1
1 ADC2
3 X% or X1%
4 Y% or X2%
5 MAG% or R% or MAG1% or R1%
6 NOISE%
7 θ or PHA; θ1 or PHA1

Digital Meters only

8 Frequency
9 X V/I or X1 V/I
10 Y V/I or Y1 V/I
11 MAG V/I or R V/I or MAG1 V/I or R1 V/I
12 NOISE V/√Hz or A/√Hz

In dual reference and dual harmonic modes parameter n2 can also be set to the
following values to allow the additional outputs given by the second detection channel
to be displayed:-

Digital Meters and Bar-Graph Displays:-

n2 Output
13 X2%
14 Y2%
15 MAG2% or R2%
16 θ2 or PHA2

Digital Meters only

17 X2 V/I
18 Y2 V/I
19 MAG2 V/I or R2 V/I

Hence in order to fully set up the output displays it is necessary to send a DISPMODE
command and then send four DISPOUT commands to set up each of the four displays.

ENBW[.] Equivalent noise bandwidth

In fixed point mode, reports the equivalent noise bandwidth of the output low-pass
filters at the current time constant setting in microhertz.

E-7
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

In floating point mode, reports the equivalent noise bandwidth of the output low-pass
filters at the current time constant setting in hertz.

NOTE: This command is not available when the reference frequency exceeds
60 kHz.

EQU n Output result of equation #1 or equation #2

The value returned is the output of the user equation #1 (n = 1) or equation #2
(n = 2), where the equations are defined using the Equation Setup menus (see section
5.3.11). The possible range is ±2,147,483,647 (signed 32-bit integer).

NOTE: There are no computer commands for defining the equations, so this must
be done manually using the Equation Setup menus.

EVENT [n] Event marker control

During a curve acquisition, if bit 13 in the CBD command has been asserted, the
lock-in amplifier stores the value of the Event variable at each sample point. This can
be used as a marker indicating the point at which an experimental parameter was
changed. The EVENT command is used to set this variable to any value between 0
and 32767.

EX [n] Output expansion control

n Expand mode
0 Off
1 Expand X
2 Expand Y
3 Expand X and Y

FET [n] Voltage mode input device control

n Selection
0 Bipolar device, 10 kΩ input impedance, 2 nV/√Hz voltage noise at 1 kHz
1 FET, 10 MΩ input impedance, 5 nV/√Hz voltage noise at 1 kHz

FLOAT [n] Input connector shield float/ground control

n Selection
0 Ground
1 Float (connected to ground via a 1 kΩ resistor)

FRQ[.] Reference frequency meter

If the lock-in amplifier is in the external reference source modes, the FRQ command
causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with 0 if the reference channel is unlocked, or
with the reference input frequency if it is locked.

If the lock-in amplifier is in the internal reference source mode, it responds with the
frequency of the internal oscillator.

In fixed point mode the frequency is in mHz.

In floating point mode the frequency is in Hz.

E-8
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

FSTART[.] [n] Oscillator frequency sweep start frequency

Sets the start frequency for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator frequency, in
the range 0 to 250 kHz.

In fixed point mode, n is in millihertz.

In floating point mode n is in hertz.

FSTEP[.] [n1 n2] Oscillator frequency sweep step size and type
The frequency may be swept either linearly or logarithmically, as specified by
parameter n2. The step size is specified by parameter n1.

Log sweep n2 = 0
In fixed point mode, n1 is the step size in thousandths of a percent.
In floating point mode n1 is in percent. The range of n1 is 0 to 100.00 %

Linear sweep n2 = 1
In fixed point mode, n1 is the step size in millihertz.
In floating point mode n1 is in hertz. The range of n1 is 0 to 10 kHz

FSTOP[.] [n] Oscillator frequency sweep stop frequency

Sets the stop frequency for a subsequent sweep of the internal oscillator frequency, in
the range 0 to 250 kHz.

In fixed point mode, n is in millihertz

In floating point mode n is in hertz.

GP [n1 [n2]] Set/Read GPIB parameters

n1 sets the GPIB address in the range 0 to 31

n2 Terminator
0 [CR], test echo disabled
1 [CR], test echo enabled
2 [CR,LF], test echo disabled
3 [CR,LF], test echo enabled
4 no terminator, test echo disabled
5 no terminator, test echo enabled

HC Halt curve acquisition

ID Identification
Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the number 7260.

IE [n] Reference channel source control (Internal/External)

n Selection
0 INT (internal)
1 EXT LOGIC (external rear panel TTL input)
2 EXT (external front panel analog input)

E-9
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

IMODE [n] Current/Voltage mode input selector

n Input mode
0 Current mode off - voltage mode input enabled
1 High bandwidth (HB) current mode enabled - connect signal to B input connector
2 Low noise (LN) current mode enabled - connect signal to B input connector

If n = 0 then the input configuration is determined by the VMODE command.

If n > 0 then current mode is enabled irrespective of the VMODE setting.

KP Key-press identifier
The response to the KP command depends on whether a front panel key has been
pressed since the last time the command was issued, and if so, on the currently
displayed menu and actual key pressed.

If a key has not been pressed since the last KP command, the response is 0

If a key has been pressed then the response is a number calculated as follows:-

KP response = (menu number × 32) + key number,

where menu number and key number are defined as follows:

Menu Menu Number

Main Display 0
Main Menu 1
Oscillator 2
Communications 3
RS232 Comms 4
Reference Channel or Dual Reference Channel 5
Signal Channel 6
Comms Test 7
Display Options 8
Display Setup 9
GPIB Comms 10
Output Channels or Output Channel (1) 11
“*” Command Options 12
DACs & ADCs 13
ADC3 Options 14
User Options 1 15
Equation 1 16
User Options 2 17
Auto Functions 18
Curve Buffer 19
Curve Select 20
ADC1&2 Options 21
Frequency Sweep 22
Amplitude Sweep 23
Virtual Reference (1) 24
Virtual Reference (2) 25
Output Channel (2) 26

E-10
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

Menu Menu Number

Quick View 27
Equation 2 28
Digital Port 29
Single Graph 30
Double Graph 31

The key numbers generated by single key-presses are shown in figure E-1.

Figure E-1, Key Number identifier

If two keys are pressed simultaneously then the key number generated is as follows:

Pressing 1 and 2 = 21
Pressing 3 and 4 = 22
Pressing 5 and 6 = 23
Pressing 7 and 8 = 24
Pressing 9 and 10 = 25
Pressing 11 and 12 = 26
Pressing 13 and 14 = 27
Pressing 15 and 16 = 28

LEN [n] Curve length control

The value of n sets the curve buffer length in effect for data acquisition. The
maximum allowed value depends on the number of curves requested using the CBD
command, and a parameter error results if the value given is too large. For this
reason, if the number of points is to be increased and the number of curves to be
stored is to be reduced using the CBD command, then the CBD command should be
issued first.

LF [n] Signal channel line frequency rejection filter control

In instruments manufactured up to June 1996, the value of n sets the mode of the line
frequency notch filter according to the following table:

n Selection
0 Off
1 On (i.e. reject 50/60 Hz and 100/120 Hz)

In instruments manufactured after June 1996, the value of n sets the mode of the line
frequency notch filter according to the following table:

n Selection
0 Off
1 Enable 50 or 60 Hz notch filter
2 Enable 100 or 120 Hz notch filter
3 Enable both filters

E-11
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

Users may identify which version of the instrument they have by sending the
command LF 3; if this is accepted by the instrument, it was made after June 1996,
but if it generates a command error, it was made prior to this date.

Additionally units made after June 1996 respond to the command, LINE50, which
sets the notch filter center frequency.

LINE50 [n] Signal channel line frequency rejection filter center frequency control
n Notch filter mode
0 60 Hz (and/or 120 Hz)
1 50 Hz (and/or 100 Hz)

Units made prior to July 1996 generate an Invalid Command (bit 1 of the serial poll
status byte is asserted) to the LINE50 command.

LOCK System lock control

Updates all frequency dependent gain and phase correction parameters.

LR[.] Log Ratio output

In integer mode, the LR command reports a number equivalent to
1000×log(X/ADC1) where X is the value that would be returned by the X command
and ADC1 is the value that would be returned by the ADC1 command. The response
range is -3000 to +2079

In floating point mode, the LR. command reports a number equivalent to

log(X/ADC1). The response range is -3.000 to +2.079

LTS [n] Lights on/off control

n Selection
0 All lights off
1 Normal operation

M Curve acquisition status monitor

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with four values that provide information
concerning data acquisition, as follows:

First value, Curve Acquisition Status: a number with five possible values, defined
by the following table:

First Value Significance

0 No curve activity in progress.
1 Acquisition via TD command in progress and running.
2 Acquisition via TDC command in progress and running.
5 Acquisition via TD command in progress but halted by HC command.
6 Acquisition via TDC command in progress but halted by HC command.

Second value, Number of Sweeps Acquired: This number is incremented each time
a TD is completed and each time a full cycle is completed on a TDC acquisition. It is
zeroed by the NC command and also whenever a CBD or LEN command is applied
without parameters.

E-12
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

Third value, Status Byte: The same as the response to the ST command. The
number returned is the decimal equivalent of the status byte and refers to the
previously applied command.

Fourth value, Number of Points Acquired: This number is incremented each time a
point is taken. It is zeroed by the NC command and whenever CBD or LEN is applied
without parameters.

MAG[.] Magnitude
In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the magnitude value
in the range 0 to 30000, full-scale being 10000.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the magnitude
value in the range +3.000E0 to +0.001E-9 volts or +3.000E-6 to +0.001E-15 amps.

MP[.] Magnitude, phase

Equivalent to the compound command MAG[.];PHA[.]

MSK [n] Set/read service request mask byte

The value of n sets the SRQ mask byte in the range 0 to 255

\N n Address command
When the model 7260 is daisy-chained with other compatible instruments this
command will change which instrument is addressed. All daisy-chained instruments
receive commands but only the currently addressed instrument will implement or
respond to the commands. The exception is the \N n command. If n matches the
address set from the front panel the instrument will switch into addressed mode. If n
does not match the address set from the front panel the instrument will switch into
unaddressed mode. Note that the \N n command does not change the address of an
instrument but which instrument is addressed.

NOTE: All instruments must have a unique address.

N Report overload byte

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the overload byte, an integer between 0
and 255, which is the decimal equivalent of a binary number with the following bit-
significance:

Bit 0 not used

Bit 1 CH1 output overload (> ±120 %FS)
Bit 2 CH2 output overload (> ±120 %FS)
Bit 3 Y channel output overload (> ±300 %FS)
Bit 4 X channel output overload (> ±300 %FS)
Bit 5 not used
Bit 6 input overload
Bit 7 reference unlock

NC New curve
Initializes the curve storage memory and status variables. All record of previously
taken curves is removed.

E-13
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

NHZ.
Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the square root of the noise spectral
density measured at the Y channel output, expressed in volt/√Hz or amps/√Hz
referred to the input. This measurement assumes that the Y channel output is
Gaussian with zero mean. (Section 3.10). The command is only available in floating
point mode.

NOTE: This command is not available when the reference frequency exceeds
60 kHz.

NN[.] Noise output

In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the mean absolute
value of the Y channel output in the range 0 to 12000, full-scale being 10000. If the
mean value of the Y channel output is zero, this is a measure of the output noise.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond in volts.

OA[.] [n] Oscillator amplitude control

In fixed point mode n sets the oscillator amplitude in mV. The range of n is 0 to 5000
representing 0 to 5 V r.m.s..

In floating point mode n sets the amplitude in volts.

OF[.] [n] Oscillator frequency control

In fixed point mode n sets the oscillator frequency in mHz. The range of n is 0 to
250,000,000 representing 0 to 250 kHz.

In floating point mode n sets the oscillator frequency in Hz. The range of n is 0 to
2.5E5

PHA[.] Signal phase

In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the signal phase in
centidegrees, in the range ±18000.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the signal phase in
degrees.

RANGE [n] Signal Recovery/Vector Voltmeter mode selector

n Mode
0 Signal Recovery
1 Vector Voltmeter

NOTE: Instrument always reverts to signal recovery mode (n=0) on power-up

REFMODE [n] Reference mode selector

n Mode
0 Single Reference / Virtual Reference mode
1 Dual Harmonic mode
2 Dual Reference mode

E-14
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

NOTE: When in either of the dual reference modes the command set changes to
accommodate the additional controls. These changes are detailed in section 6.4.14

REFN [n] Reference harmonic mode control

The value of n sets the reference channel to one of the NF modes, or restores it to the
default 1F mode. The value of n is in the range 1 to 65535.

REFP[.] [n] Reference phase control

In fixed point mode n sets the phase in millidegrees in the range ±360000.
In floating point mode n sets the phase in degrees.

REMOTE [n] Remote only (front panel lock-out) control

Allowed values of n are 0 and 1. When n is equal to 1, the lock-in amplifier enters
remote only mode in which the front panel control functions are inoperative and the
instrument can only be controlled with the RS232 or the GPIB interfaces. When n is
equal to 0, the front panel controls function normally.

REV Report firmware revision

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the firmware revision number. This gives
a four line response which the controlling program must be able to accept.

RS [n1 [n2]] Set/read RS232 interface parameters

n1 Baud rate (bits per second)
0 75
1 110
2 134.5
3 150
4 300
5 600
6 1200
7 1800
8 2000
9 2400
10 4800
11 9600
12 19200

The lowest five bits in n2 control the other RS232 parameters according to the
following table:

bit number bit negated bit asserted

0 data + parity = 8 bits data + parity = 9 bits
1 no parity bit 1 parity bit
2 even parity odd parity
3 echo disabled echo enabled
4 prompt disabled prompt enabled

E-15
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

RT[.] Ratio output

In integer mode the RT command reports a number equivalent to 1000×X/ADC1
where X is the value that would be returned by the X command and ADC1 is the
value that would be returned by the ADC1 command.

In floating point mode the RT. command reports a number equivalent to X/ADC1.

SAMPLE [n] Main analog to digital converter sample rate control

n may be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3, corresponding to four different sampling rates (not
specified) near 166 kHz.

SEN [n]
SEN. Full-scale sensitivity control
n full-scale sensitivity
IMODE=0 IMODE=1 IMODE=2
1 2 nV 2 fA n/a
2 5 nV 5 fA n/a
3 10 nV 10 fA n/a
4 20 nV 20 fA n/a
5 50 nV 50 fA n/a
6 100 nV 100 fA n/a
7 200 nV 200 fA 2 fA
8 500 nV 500 fA 5 fA
9 1 µV 1 pA 10 fA
10 2 µV 2 pA 20 fA
11 5 µV 5 pA 50 fA
12 10 µV 10 pA 100 fA
13 20 µV 20 pA 200 fA
14 50 µV 50 pA 500 fA
15 100 µV 100 pA 1 pA
16 200 µV 200 pA 2 pA
17 500 µV 500 pA 5 pA
18 1 mV 1 nA 10 pA
19 2 mV 2 nA 20 pA
20 5 mV 5 nA 50 pA
21 10 mV 10 nA 100 pA
22 20 mV 20 nA 200 pA
23 50 mV 50 nA 500 pA
24 100 mV 100 nA 1 nA
25 200 mV 200 nA 2 nA
26 500 mV 500 nA 5 nA
27 1V 1 µA 10 nA

SLOPE [n] Output low-pass filter slope (roll-off) control

n Slope
0 6 dB/octave
1 12 dB/octave
2 18 dB/octave
3 24 dB/octave

E-16
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

SRATE[.] [n] Oscillator frequency and amplitude sweep step rate

Sets the sweep rate in time per step in the range 50 ms to 1000 s, in 5 ms increments.

ST Report status byte

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the status byte, an integer between 0 and
255, which is the decimal equivalent of a binary number with the following bit-
significance:

Bit 0 Command complete

Bit 1 Invalid command
Bit 2 Command parameter error
Bit 3 Reference unlock
Bit 4 Overload
Bit 5 New ADC values available after external trigger
Bit 6 Asserted SRQ
Bit 7 Data available

NOTE: this command is not normally used in GPIB communications, where the
status byte is accessed by performing a serial poll.

STAR [n] Star mode setup command

n Data returned by * command
0 X
1 Y
2 MAG
3 PHA
4 ADC1
5 XY
6 MP
7 ADC1;ADC2
8 X1;X2
9 Y1;Y2
10 MAG1;MAG2
11 PHA1;PHA2

* Transfer command
This command establishes the high-speed transfer mode. Use the STAR command to
set up the desired response to the * command, and then send an * (ASCII 42), without
terminator, to the instrument. The instrument will reply with the selected output as
quickly as possible, and then wait for another *. If the computer processes the reply
quickly and responds immediately with another *, then very rapid controlled data
transfer is possible.

The first transfer takes a little longer than subsequent ones because some overhead
time is required for the model 7260 to get into the high-speed transfer mode. When in
this mode, the front panel controls are inactive and the display is frozen.

The mode is terminated either by sending any command other than an *, when the
instrument will exit the mode and process the new command, or after a period of 10
seconds following the last * command.

E-17
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

NOTE: Check that the computer program does not automatically add a carriage
return or carriage return-line feed terminator to the * command, since these
characters will slow down communications.

STR [n] Storage interval control

Sets the time interval between successive points being acquired under the TD or TDC
commands. n specifies the time interval in ms with a resolution of 5 ms, input values
being rounded up to a multiple of 5. The longest interval that can be specified is
1000000 s corresponding to one point in about 12 days.

In addition, n may be set to 0, which sets the rate of data storage to the curve buffer
to 800 Hz. However this only allows storage of the X and Y channel outputs. There is
no need to issue a CBD 3 command to set this up since it happens automatically when
acquisition starts.

If the time constant is set to 5 ms or longer, then the actual time constant applied to
the stored X and Y channel output values will be 640 µs, but if it is set to a shorter
value then this will be the time constant actually used.

SWEEP [n] Oscillator frequency and amplitude sweep start/stop

n Sweep status
0 Stop/Pause
1 Start frequency sweep
2 Start amplitude sweep
3 Start frequency sweep and amplitude sweep

SYNC [n] Synchronous time constant control

n Effect
0 Synchronous time constant disabled
1 Synchronous time constant enabled

SYNCOSC [n] Synchronous oscillator (demodulator monitor) control

This control operates only in external reference mode.

n Effect
0 Synchronous Oscillator (Demodulator Monitor) disabled
1 Synchronous Oscillator (Demodulator Monitor) enabled

TADC [n] Auxiliary ADC trigger mode control

The value of n sets the trigger mode of the auxiliary ADC inputs according to the
following table:
n Trigger mode
0 Asynchronous 5 ms intervals)
1 External (rear panel TRIG input)
2 Burst mode, fixed rate, triggered by command (ADC1 only)
3 Burst mode, fixed rate, triggered by command (ADC1 and ADC2)
4 Burst mode, variable rate, triggered by command (ADC1 only)
5 Burst mode, variable rate, triggered by command (ADC1 and ADC2)
6 Burst mode, fixed rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 only)

E-18
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

n Trigger mode
7 Burst mode, fixed rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 and
ADC2)
8 Burst mode, variable rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 only)
9 Burst mode, variable rate, External trigger (rear panel TRIG input) (ADC1 and
ADC2)

TC [n]
TC. Filter time constant control
n time constant
0 10 µs
1 20 µs
2 40 µs
3 80 µs
4 160 µs
5 320 µs
6 640 µs
7 5 ms
8 10 ms
9 20 ms
10 50 ms
11 100 ms
12 200 ms
13 500 ms
14 1s
15 2s
16 5s
17 10 s
18 20 s
19 50 s
20 100 s
21 200 s
22 500 s
23 1 ks
24 2 ks
25 5 ks
26 10 ks
27 20 ks
28 50 ks
29 100 ks

The TC. command is only used for reading the time constant, and reports the current
setting in seconds. Hence if a TC 11 command were sent, TC would report 11 and
TC. would report 1.0E-01, i.e. 0.1 s or 100 ms.

TD Take data
Initiates data acquisition. Acquisition starts at the current position in the curve buffer
and continues at the rate set by the STR command until the buffer is full.

E-19
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

TDC Take data continuously

TDT n Take data triggered
n function
0 One complete curve is acquired for each trigger
1 One complete set of data points is acquired for each trigger. Note that in this
mode the maximum trigger rate is 200 Hz and the storage interval control setting
has no effect.

VER Report firmware version

Causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the firmware version number. The
firmware version number is the number displayed on the front panel UserOptions2
menu.

VMODE [n] Voltage input configuration

n Input configuration
0 Both inputs grounded (test mode)
1 A input only
2 -B input only
3 A-B differential mode

Note that the IMODE command takes precedence over the VMODE command.

VRLOCK [n] Virtual reference mode lock

The Seek option of the frequency sweep mode must be used before issuing this
command, for which the value of n has the following significance:

n Mode
0 Disables virtual reference mode
1 Enters virtual reference mode by enabling tracking of the signal frequency

X[.] X channel output

In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the X demodulator
output in the range ±30000, full-scale being ±10000.

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the X demodulator
output in volts or amps.

XOF [n1 [n2]] X channel output offset control

n1 Selection
0 Disables offset
1 Enables offset facility

The range of n2 is ±30000 corresponding to ±300 % full-scale.

XY[.] X, Y channel outputs

Equivalent to the compound command X[.];Y[.]

Y[.] Y channel output

In fixed point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the Y demodulator
output in the range ±30000, full-scale being ±10000.

E-20
 Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

In floating point mode causes the lock-in amplifier to respond with the Y demodulator
output in volts or amps.

YOF [n1 [n2]] Y channel output offset control

n1 Selection
0 Disables offset facility
1 Enables offset facility

The range of n2 is ±30000 corresponding to ±300 % full-scale.

E-21
Appendix E, ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS

E-22
Default Settings

Appendix F

Auto Default Function

The Auto-Default function sets the model 7260’s controls and output displays as
follows:-

Main Display Menu

Displays the AC Gain, full-scale sensitivity, time constant and oscillator frequency
controls on the left-hand side. On the right-hand side, the display mode is set to two
bar-graphs and two large digital displays, showing signal magnitude and X channel
and Y channel outputs as a percentage of full-scale and signal phase in degrees.

The fourteen basic instrument controls are set to the following values:-

Full-scale sensitivity 500 mV

AC Gain 0 dB
Time constant 100 ms
Slope 12 dB/octave
Oscillator frequency 1000.000 Hz
Oscillator amplitude 0.500 mV rms
DAC1 output 0.000 V
DAC2 output 0.000 V
DAC3 output 0.000 V
DAC4 output 0.000 V
Phase 0.00°
Phase quadrant 0.00°
X channel output offset 0.00 %
Y channel output offset 0.00 %

The remaining instrument controls, accessed via the menus, are set as follows:-

Signal Channel
Input mode Single-ended voltage mode, A input connector
Coupling AC
Input connector shell Floating
Input device FET
Line frequency rejection filter Off
Automatic AC Gain Off

Reference Channel
Reference mode Internal
Reference harmonic 1st
Ext source FP
Synchronous oscillator Off
Operating Mode Signal Recovery, Single Reference

F-1
Appendix F, DEFAULT SETTINGS

Output Channels
Output expansion Off
Output offset Off
TC’s Sync

Frequency Sweep
Start Frequency 0.000 Hz
Stop Frequency 0.000 Hz
Step Size 0.000 Hz
Step Rate 1000 ms
Armed No
Law Log

Amplitude Sweep
Start Amplitude 0.000 V
Stop Amplitude 0.000 V
Step Size 0.000 V
Step Rate 1000 ms
Armed No

User Options 1
CH1 analog output X%
CH2 analog output Y%

Equation #1 Setup
Equation #1 zero

Equation #2 Setup
Equation #2 zero

ADC1&2 Options
ADC1 & 2 Trigger Rate 5 ms

ADC3 Options
ADC3 Sample Time 1.000 s

Curve Buffer
Sample Rate 10 ms
Length 32768

Curve Select
Selected curve X (i.e. CBD = 1)

User Options 2
Sample rate adjustment 0
Operating mode Single Reference

F-2
 Appendix F, DEFAULT SETTINGS

RS232 Comms
Baud rate 9600
Data bits 7 + 1 Parity
Delimiter , (044)
Address 1
Character echo On
Parity Even
Prompt character On

GPIB Comms
Address 12
Terminator [CR],[LF]
Test Echo Disabled
SRQ mask byte 0

‘*’ Command Options

Selected output MP

Digital Port
Digital outputs 0 (i.e. D0 - D7 are at logic zero)

Display Options
Display contrast 65
Backlight On

F-3
Appendix F, DEFAULT SETTINGS

F-4
Index

Index

* command 6-18, E-17 ASTOP[.] [n] command 6-19, E-2

‘*’ Command Options Menu 5-44 Auto Default
\N n command 6-29, E-13 list of settings F-1
8-bit programmable output port 3-18 Auto functions
90° reference phase shifter 5-6 Auto-Default 3-20, 5-38
Auto-Measure 3-20, 5-38
AC / DC input coupling 3-4 Auto-Offset 3-20, 5-37
AC Gain Auto-Phase 3-19, 5-11, 5-36
and Auto-Measure 3-20, 5-38 Auto-Sensitivity 3-19, 5-37
and Auto-Sensitivity 3-20, 5-38 introduction 3-18
and dynamic reserve 5-5 AUTOMATIC [n] command 6-11, E-2
and effect on accuracy 3-21 Auxiliary ADC’s 4-7
and full scale sensitivity 3-6 AXO command 6-15, E-2
and input overload 3-6
AUTOMATIC control 3-6, 5-10 Baseband reference mode 3-9
control 5-3, 5-4 Burst mode control 5-26
description of 3-6 BURSTRATE [n] command 6-22, E-2
Accuracy 3-21 BYTE [n] command 6-21, E-2
ACGAIN [n] command 6-11, E-1
ADC CBD [n] command 6-23, E-3
sample rate control 5-32 CH n1 [n2] command 6-16, E-4
sample rate control described 3-9 CH1
sampling frequency 3-7 and user equations 5-25
trigger input 4-7 connector 4-7
trigger mode control 5-26 described 3-17
ADC[.] n command 6-21, E-1 minimum time constant 3-14
ADC1 output expansion 3-15
ADC1 & 2 Options Menu 5-26 output selection 5-20
auxiliary input 3-18 CH2
connector 4-7 and user equations 5-25
ADC2 connector 4-7
ADC1 & 2 Options Menu 5-26 described 3-17
auxiliary input 3-18 minimum time constant 3-14
connector 4-7 output expansion 3-15
ADC3 output selection 5-20
ADC3 Options Menu 5-28 Commands
connector 4-7 alphabetical listing of E-1
ADC3TIME [n] command 6-21, E-1 compound commands 6-7
ADF command 6-34, E-1 delimiters 6-7
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 3-8 floating point mode 6-7
for Auto-Default function 6-34
Anti-aliasing filter 3-7
for auxiliary inputs 6-21
AQN command 6-13, E-1 for auxiliary outputs 6-21
AS command 6-11, E-1 for computer interfaces 6-28
ASM command 6-11, E-2 for data curve buffer 6-23
ASTART[.] [n] command 6-19, E-1 for dual harmonic mode 6-34
ASTEP[.] [n] command 6-19, E-1 for dual reference mode 6-34

Index-1
INDEX

for front panel control 6-31 Demodulator

for instrument identification 6-30 DSP 3-14
for instrument outputs 6-16 gain 3-6
for internal oscillator 6-19 Differential voltage input mode 3-4
for reference channel 6-13 DIGITAL OUTPUTS connector 4-6
for signal channel inputs 6-9 Digital Port Menu 5-45
for signal channel output amplifiers 6-15
DISP Key 4-5
for signal channel output filters 6-14
format 6-6 DISP n1 [n2] command 6-31, E-6
Common mode rejection ratio (C.M.R.R.) 3-4 Display
backlight control 5-46
Comms Test Menu 5-43
contrast control 5-46
Communications Menu 5-39
Display Options Menu 5-46
Computer control, sample programs 6-35
Display Setup Menu 5-5
Computer operation, introduction 6-1
DISPMODE [n] command 6-31, E-6
CP [n] command 6-10, E-4
DISPOUT n1 [n2] command 6-31, E-7
Current input mode 5-8
Double Graph Menu 5-35
Current to voltage converter 5-8
Dual harmonic mode
Current/Voltage input mode selection 5-8
Auto-Functions Menu 5-68
Curve Buffer Menu 5-29 described 3-2
Curve Select Menu 5-31 Main Display 5-61
Curve storage maximum frequency 5-1
additional curves with dual modes 6-1 menu descriptions 5-61
commands for 6-23 minimum time constants 3-15
Curve Buffer Menu 5-29 Output Channel (1) Menu 5-65
Curve Select Menu 5-31 Output Channel (2) Menu 5-67
data acquisition controls 5-30 output display choices 5-62
length control 5-29 Reference Channel Menu 5-63
number of sweeps control 5-30 Setup Menu 5-61
programming examples 6-36, 6-38 signal channel restrictions 3-2
rate control 5-29 User Options 2 Menu 5-69
Dual Reference Mode
DAC[.] n1 [n2] command 6-21, E-4 output display choices 5-54
DAC1 Dual reference mode
auxiliary output 3-18 Auto Functions Menu 5-60
connector 4-7 described 3-1, 5-1
control 5-25 Ext Output Channel (1) Menu 5-56
DAC2 harmonic selection 5-56
auxiliary output 3-18 Int Output Channel (2) Menu 5-58
connector 4-7 Main Display 5-53
control 5-25 menu descriptions 5-52
DAC3 minimum time constants 3-15
auxiliary output 3-18 Reference Channel Menu 5-54
connector 4-7 Setup Menu 5-52
control 5-25 signal channel restrictions 3-1
DAC4 User Options 2 Menu 5-60
auxiliary output 3-18
connector 4-7 ENBW[.] command 6-18, E-7
control 5-25 EQU n command 6-18, E-8
DACs & ADCs Menu 5-25 Equation #1 / Equation #2 Setup Menus 5-24
DC[.] n command 6-26, E-5 EVENT [n] command 6-25, E-8
DCT n command 6-27, E-5 EX [n] command 6-16, E-8
DD [n] command 6-29, E-6
Delimiters 5-40, 6-7

Index-2
 INDEX

FAST X HELP Key 4-4

connector 4-8 Highband reference mode 3-9
output 3-14
output filter slope 3-15 ID command 6-30, E-9
FAST Y IE [n] command 6-13, E-9
connector 4-8 IMODE [n] command 6-9, E-10
output 3-14 Initial checks 2-3
output filter slope 3-15 Input
FET [n] command 6-10, E-8 AC/DC coupling mode 3-4
FET input device 3-3 connector selection 3-4, 4-1
FLOAT [n] command 6-10, E-8 connector shell ground/float 3-4
Front Panel coupling 5-8
layout 4-1 current/voltage mode control 5-8
Operation 5-1 current/voltage mode selection 3-5
Front panel keys device selection 5-9
active cursor 4-3 device selection FET/BIPOLAR 3-4
auto repeat 4-3 overload indicators 4-1
control zeroing 4-4 Inspection 2-1
executing pre-programmed functions 4-4
selecting menus 4-4 Key specifications 1-3
FRQ[.] command 6-13, E-8 KP command 6-32, E-10
FSTART[.] [n] command 6-20, E-9
LEN [n] command 6-24, E-11
FSTEP[.] [n1 n2] command 6-20, E-9
LF [n] command 6-12, E-11
FSTOP[.] [n] command 6-20, E-9
Line cord 2-1
Fuses
Line frequency rejection filter 3-5
line 2-1
ratings 2-2 Line power input assembly 4-6
Line power switch 4-6
GP [n1 [n2]] command 6-29, E-9 Line voltage selection 2-1
GPIB Comms Menu 5-42 LINE50 [n] command 6-12, E-12
GPIB interface LOCK command 6-13, E-12
address selection 5-42 Log Ratio output 5-22
Comms Test Menu 6-9 LR[.] command 6-17, E-12
connector 4-6 LTS [n] command 6-34, E-12
general features 6-4
handshaking and echoes 6-5 M command 6-26, E-12
service request mask byte control 5-43 MAG[.] command 6-17, E-13
service requests 6-8
Main Menu 5-7
status byte 6-7
terminator selection 5-42 Main Menu structure 5-2
terminators 6-6 MENU Key 4-5
test echo control 5-42 MENU key 5-2
Graphical display Menu structure 5-2
Auto-Scale 5-33 MP[.] command 6-17, E-13
cursor keys 5-34 MSK [n] command 6-30, E-13
curve selection keys 5-34, 5-35
data acquisition control keys 5-34, 5-36 N command 6-30, E-13
Double Graph Menu 5-35 NC command 6-24, E-13
limitations with dual modes 6-1 NHZ. command 6-17, E-14
scale keys 5-35 NN[.] command 6-18, E-14
Single Graph Menu 5-33
Noise measurements 3-17
HC command 6-25, E-9

Index-3
INDEX

OA[.] [n] command 6-19, E-14 RS [n1 [n2]] command 6-28, E-15
OF[.] [n] command 6-19, E-14 RS232 and GPIB Operation 6-2
Operating environment 2-1 RS232 Comms Menu 5-40
Operating Modes 3-1 RS232 interface
OSC OUT connector 4-2 address control 5-41
Oscillator AUX RS232 connector 4-6
Amplitude Sweep Menu 5-18 auxiliary RS232 interface - described 6-4
Frequency Sweep Menu 5-15 auxiliary RS232 interface address 5-41
frequency sweeps - general 3-13 baud rate control 5-40
Oscillator Menu 5-14 character echo control 5-41
output amplitude sweeps - general 3-13 choice of baud rate 6-3
output update rate 3-12 choice of number of data bits 6-3
overview 3-11 choice of parity check option 6-3
synchronous oscillator output 5-15 Comms Test Menu 6-9
Output connector 4-6
expand control 5-13 general features 6-2
filter slope control 5-13 handshaking and echoes 6-5
offset 5-6 N (overload) command 6-7
output expansion 3-15 number of data bits control 5-40
output filters 3-14 parity control 5-41
output offset 3-15 prompt character control 5-41
synchronous output filters 3-15 prompts 6-7
time constant control 5-13 ST (status) command 6-7
time constant mode 5-13 terminators 6-6
RT[.] command 6-17, E-16
PHA[.] command 6-17, E-14
PREAMP POWER connector 4-6 SAMPLE [n] command 6-12, E-16
SEN [n] command 6-10, E-16
Rack mounting 2-1 SEN. command 6-10, E-16
RANGE [n] command 6-12, E-14 SET Key 4-5
Ratio output 5-22 SIG MON connector 4-7
Rear panel layout 4-5 Signal channel inputs 3-3
REF IN connector 4-2 Signal Channel Menu
REF MON connector 4-6 current input mode 5-7
REF TTL connector 4-7 voltage input mode 5-7
Reference channel DSP 3-9 Signal phase 3-16
Reference frequency display 5-6 Signal recovery mode 3-1, 5-11
Reference harmonic 5-10 Single Graph Menu 5-33
Reference mode Single harmonic mode
External 3-2 described 3-2
external 3-9 Single Reference Mode
Internal 3-2 output display choices 5-4
internal 3-10 Single reference mode 5-32
Reference phase 5-10 Auto Functions Menu 5-36
Reference phase control 5-6 described 3-1, 5-1
Reference phase shifter 3-10 Main Display 5-3
menu descriptions 5-3
Reference source control 5-10
Output Channels Menu 5-12
REFMODE [n] command 6-13, E-14
Reference Channel Menu 5-10
REFN [n] command E-15 User Options 1 Menu 5-19
REFP[.] [n] command 6-13, E-15 SLOPE [n] command 6-14, E-16
REMOTE [n] command 6-30, E-15 Specifications
REV command 6-30, E-15 detailed listing of A-1

Index-4
 INDEX

for auxiliary inputs A-4

for data storage buffer A-6
for demodulator A-3
for measurement modes A-1
for operating modes A-1
for oscillator A-4
for outputs A-5
for reference channel A-2
for signal channel A-2
SRATE[.] [n] command 6-20, E-17
ST command 6-30, E-17
STAR [n] command 6-18, E-17
STR [n] command 6-25, E-18
SWEEP [n] command 6-20, E-18
SYNC [n] command 6-15, E-18
Synchronous Time Constants 5-13
SYNCOSC [n] command 6-20, E-18

TADC [n] command 6-22, E-18

TC [n] command 6-14, E-19
TC. command 6-14, E-19
TD command 6-25, E-19
TDC command 6-25, E-20
TDT n command 6-25, E-20
Terminators 6-6
TRIG connector 4-7
Typical Lock-in Amplifier Experiment 5-70

Vector magnitude 3-16

Vector voltmeter mode 3-1, 5-11
VER command 6-31, E-20
Virtual reference mode
described 3-2, 5-1
Main Display 5-51
manual setup 5-48
semi-automatic setup 5-47
setup menus 5-47
User Options 2 Menu 5-52
virtual lock key 5-50
Virtual Reference (1) Menu 5-47, 5-50
VMODE [n] command 6-10, E-20
Voltage input mode 5-8
VRLOCK [n] command 6-14, E-20

What is a lock-in amplifier? 1-2

X[.] command 6-16, E-20

XOF [n1 [n2]] command 6-15, E-20
XY[.] command 6-17, E-20

Y[.] command 6-17, E-20

YOF [n1 [n2]] command 6-15, E-21

Index-5
INDEX

Index-6
 WARRANTY

EG&G Instruments Corporation warrants each instrument of its own manufacture to be free of defects in material and
workmanship for a period of ONE year from the date of delivery to the original purchaser. Obligations under this Warranty
shall be limited to replacing, repairing or giving credit for the purchase, at our option, of any instruments returned, shipment
prepaid, to our Service Department for that purpose, provided prior authorization for such return has been given by an
authorized representative of EG&G Instruments Corporation.

This Warranty shall not apply to any instrument, which our inspection shall disclose to our satisfaction, to have become
defective or unusable due to abuse, mishandling, misuse, accident, alteration, negligence, improper installation, or other
causes beyond our control. This Warranty shall not apply to any instrument or component not manufactured by EG&G
Instruments Corporation. When products manufactured by others are included in EG&G Instruments Corporation equipment,
the original manufacturers Warranty is extended to EG&G Instruments customers.

EG&G Instruments Corporation reserves the right to make changes in design at any time without incurring any obligation to
install same on units previously purchased.

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. THIS WARRANTY IS
IN LIEU OF, AND EXCLUDES ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AS WELL AS ANY AND ALL
OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES OF EG&G INSTRUMENTS CORPORATION, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. NO PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR EG&G
INSTRUMENTS CORPORATION ANY ADDITIONAL OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY NOT EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR HEREIN
EXCEPT IN WRITING DULY EXECUTED BY AN OFFICER OF EG&G INSTRUMENTS CORPORATION.

SHOULD YOUR EQUIPMENT REQUIRE SERVICE

A. Contact your local EG&G Instruments office, agent, representative or distributor to discuss the problem. In many cases it
may be possible to expedite servicing by localizing the problem to a particular plug-in circuit board.

B. We will need the following information, a copy of which should also be attached to any equipment which is returned for
service.

1. Model number and serial number of instrument 6. Symptoms (in detail, including control settings)

2. Your name (instrument user) 7. Your purchase order number for repair charges
(does not apply to repairs in warranty)
3. Your address
8. Shipping instructions (if you wish to authorize
4. Address to which the instrument should be shipment by any method other than normal surface
returned transportation)

5. Your telephone number and extension

C. If you experience any difficulties in obtaining service please contact

EG&G SIGNAL RECOVERY

Sorbus House Phone: +44 (0)118 977 3003
Mulberry Business Park Fax: +44 (0)118 977 3493
WOKINGHAM RG41 2GY E-mail: service_sigrecovery@[Link]
United Kingdom